Math::libPARI.dumb man page on OpenServer

Man page or keyword search:  
man Server   5388 pages
apropos Keyword Search (all sections)
Output format
OpenServer logo
[printable version]

libPARI.dumb(3)	      User Contributed Perl Documentation      libPARI.dumb(3)

NAME
       libPARI - Functions and Operations Available in PARI and GP

DESCRIPTION
       The functions and operators available in PARI and in the GP/PARI calcu-
       lator are numerous and everexpanding. Here is a description of the ones
       available in version 2.2.0. It should be noted that many of these func-
       tions accept quite different types as arguments, but others are more
       restricted. The list of acceptable types will be given for each func-
       tion or class of functions.  Except when stated otherwise, it is under-
       stood that a function or operation which should make natural sense is
       legal. In this chapter, we will describe the functions according to a
       rough classification. The general entry looks something like:

       foo"(x,{"flag" = 0})": short description.

       The library syntax is foo"(x,"flag")".

       This means that the GP function "foo" has one mandatory argument "x",
       and an optional one, flag, whose default value is 0 (the "{}" should
       never be typed, it is just a convenient notation we will use throughout
       to denote optional arguments). That is, you can type "foo(x,2)", or
       foo(x), which is then understood to mean "foo(x,0)". As well, a comma
       or closing parenthesis, where an optional argument should have been,
       signals to GP it should use the default. Thus, the syntax "foo(x,)" is
       also accepted as a synonym for our last expression. When a function has
       more than one optional argument, the argument list is filled with user
       supplied values, in order.  And when none are left, the defaults are
       used instead. Thus, assuming that "foo"'s prototype had been

	 foo"({x = 1},{y = 2},{z = 3}), "

       typing in "foo(6,4)" would give you "foo(6,4,3)". In the rare case when
       you want to set some far away flag, and leave the defaults in between
       as they stand, you can use the ``empty arg'' trick alluded to above:
       "foo(6,,1)" would yield "foo(6,2,1)". By the way, "foo()" by itself
       yields "foo(1,2,3)" as was to be expected. In this rather special case
       of a function having no mandatory argument, you can even omit the "()":
       a standalone "foo" would be enough (though we don't really recommend it
       for your scripts, for the sake of clarity). In defining GP syntax, we
       strove to put optional arguments at the end of the argument list (of
       course, since they would not make sense otherwise), and in order of
       decreasing usefulness so that, most of the time, you will be able to
       ignore them.

       Binary Flags. For some of these optional flags, we adopted the custom-
       ary binary notation as a compact way to represent many toggles with
       just one number. Letting "(p_0,...,p_n)" be a list of switches (i.e. of
       properties which can be assumed to take either the value 0 or 1), the
       number "2^3 + 2^5 = 40" means that "p_3" and "p_5" have been set (that
       is, set to 1), and none of the others were (that is, they were set to
       0). This will usually be announced as ``The binary digits of flag mean
       1: "p_0", 2: "p_1", 4: "p_2"'', and so on, using the available consecu-
       tive powers of 2.

       Pointers. If a parameter in the function prototype is prefixed with a &
       sign, as in

       foo"(x,&e)"

       it means that, besides the normal return value, the variable named "e"
       may be set as a side effect. When passing the argument, the & sign has
       to be typed in explicitly. As of version 2.2.0, this "pointer" argument
       is optional for all documented functions, hence the & will always
       appear between brackets as in "issquare""(x,{&e})".

       About library programming. To finish with our generic simple-minded
       example, the library function "foo", as defined above, is seen to have
       two mandatory arguments, "x" and flag (no PARI mathematical function
       has been implemented so as to accept a variable number of arguments).
       When not mentioned otherwise, the result and arguments of a function
       are assumed implicitly to be of type "GEN".  Most other functions
       return an object of type "long" integer in C (see Chapter 4). The vari-
       able or parameter names prec and flag always denote "long" integers.

       The "entree" type is used by the library to implement iterators (loops,
       sums, integrals, etc.) when a formal variable has to successively
       assume a number of values in a given set. When programming with the
       library, it is easier and much more efficient to code loops and the
       like directly. Hence this type is not documented, although it does
       appear in a few library function prototypes below. See "Label se:sums"
       for more details.

Standard monadic or dyadic operators
       +"/"-

       The expressions "+""x" and "-""x" refer to monadic operators (the first
       does nothing, the second negates "x").

       The library syntax is gneg"(x)" for "-""x".

       +, "-"

       The expression "x" "+" "y" is the sum and "x" "-" "y" is the difference
       of "x" and "y". Among the prominent impossibilities are addition/sub-
       traction between a scalar type and a vector or a matrix, between vec-
       tor/matrices of incompatible sizes and between an integermod and a real
       number.

       The library syntax is gadd"(x,y)" "x" "+" "y", gsub"(x,y)" for "x" "-"
       "y".

       *

       The expression "x" "*" "y" is the product of "x" and "y". Among the
       prominent impossibilities are multiplication between vector/matrices of
       incompatible sizes, between an integermod and a real number. Note that
       because of vector and matrix operations, "*" is not necessarily commu-
       tative. Note also that since multiplication between two column or two
       row vectors is not allowed, to obtain the scalar product of two vectors
       of the same length, you must multiply a line vector by a column vector,
       if necessary by transposing one of the vectors (using the operator "~"
       or the function "mattranspose", see "Label se:linear_algebra").

       If "x" and "y" are binary quadratic forms, compose them. See also "qfb-
       nucomp" and "qfbnupow".

       The library syntax is gmul"(x,y)" for "x" "*" "y". Also available is
       gsqr"(x)" for "x" "*" "x" (faster of course!).

       /

       The expression "x" "/" "y" is the quotient of "x" and "y". In addition
       to the impossibilities for multiplication, note that if the divisor is
       a matrix, it must be an invertible square matrix, and in that case the
       result is "x*y^{-1}". Furthermore note that the result is as exact as
       possible: in particular, division of two integers always gives a ratio-
       nal number (which may be an integer if the quotient is exact) and not
       the Euclidean quotient (see "x" "\" "y" for that), and similarly the
       quotient of two polynomials is a rational function in general. To
       obtain the approximate real value of the quotient of two integers, add
       0. to the result; to obtain the approximate "p"-adic value of the quo-
       tient of two integers, add "O(p^k)" to the result; finally, to obtain
       the Taylor series expansion of the quotient of two polynomials, add
       "O(X^k)" to the result or use the "taylor" function (see "Label se:tay-
       lor").

       The library syntax is gdiv"(x,y)" for "x" "/" "y".

       \

       The expression "x" "\" "y" is the

       Euclidean quotient of "x" and "y". The types must be either both inte-
       ger or both polynomials. The result is the Euclidean quotient. In the
       case of integer division, the quotient is such that the corresponding
       remainder is non-negative.

       The library syntax is gdivent"(x,y)" for "x" "\" "y".

       \/

       The expression "x" "\/" "y" is the Euclidean quotient of "x" and "y".
       The types must be either both integer or both polynomials. The result
       is the rounded Euclidean quotient. In the case of integer division, the
       quotient is such that the corresponding remainder is smallest in abso-
       lute value and in case of a tie the quotient closest to "+ oo " is cho-
       sen.

       The library syntax is gdivround"(x,y)" for "x" "\/" "y".

       %

       The expression "x" "%" "y" is the

       Euclidean remainder of "x" and "y". The modulus "y" must be of type
       integer or polynomial. The result is the remainder, always non-negative
       in the case of integers. Allowed dividend types are scalar exact types
       when the modulus is an integer, and polynomials, polmods and rational
       functions when the modulus is a polynomial.

       The library syntax is gmod"(x,y)" for "x" "%" "y".

       divrem"(x,y)"

       creates a column vector with two components, the first being the
       Euclidean quotient, the second the Euclidean remainder, of the division
       of "x" by "y". This avoids the need to do two divisions if one needs
       both the quotient and the remainder. The arguments must be both inte-
       gers or both polynomials; in the case of integers, the remainder is
       non-negative.

       The library syntax is gdiventres"(x,y)".

       ^

       The expression "x^n" is powering.  If the exponent is an integer, then
       exact operations are performed using binary (left-shift) powering tech-
       niques. In particular, in this case "x" cannot be a vector or matrix
       unless it is a square matrix (and moreover invertible if the exponent
       is negative). If "x" is a "p"-adic number, its precision will increase
       if "v_p(n) > 0". PARI is able to rewrite the multiplication "x * x" of
       two identical objects as "x^2", or sqr(x) (here, identical means the
       operands are two different labels referencing the same chunk of memory;
       no equality test is performed). This is no longer true when more than
       two arguments are involved.

       If the exponent is not of type integer, this is treated as a transcen-
       dental function (see "Label se:trans"), and in particular has the
       effect of componentwise powering on vector or matrices.

       As an exception, if the exponent is a rational number "p/q" and "x" an
       integer modulo a prime, return a solution "y" of "y^q = x^p" if it
       exists. Currently, "q" must not have large prime factors.

       Beware that

	 ? Mod(7,19)^(1/2)
	 %1 = Mod(11, 19)/*is any square root*/
	 ? sqrt(Mod(7,19))
	 %2 = Mod(8, 19)/*is the smallest square root*/
	 ? Mod(7,19)^(3/5)
	 %3 = Mod(1, 19)
	 ? %3^(5/3)
	 %4 = Mod(1, 19)/*Mod(7,19) is just another cubic root*/

       The library syntax is gpow"(x,n,"prec")" for "x^n".

       shift"(x,n)" or "x" "<< " "n" ( = "x" ">> " "(-n)")

       shifts "x" componentwise left by "n" bits if "n >= 0" and right by
       "|n|" bits if "n < 0". A left shift by "n" corresponds to multiplica-
       tion by "2^n". A right shift of an integer "x" by "|n|" corresponds to
       a Euclidean division of "x" by "2^{|n|}" with a remainder of the same
       sign as "x", hence is not the same (in general) as "x \ 2^n".

       The library syntax is gshift"(x,n)" where "n" is a "long".

       shiftmul"(x,n)"

       multiplies "x" by "2^n". The difference with "shift" is that when "n <
       0", ordinary division takes place, hence for example if "x" is an inte-
       ger the result may be a fraction, while for "shift" Euclidean division
       takes place when "n < 0" hence if "x" is an integer the result is still
       an integer.

       The library syntax is gmul2n"(x,n)" where "n" is a "long".

       Comparison and boolean operators

       The six standard comparison operators "<= ", "< ", ">= ", "> ", " == ",
       "! = " are available in GP, and in library mode under the names gle,
       glt, gge, ggt, geq, gne respectively. The library syntax is co"(x,y)",
       where co is the comparison operator. The result is 1 (as a "GEN") if
       the comparison is true, 0 (as a "GEN") if it is false.

       The standard boolean functions  "||" (inclusive or), "&&" (and) and "!"
       (not) are also available, and the library syntax is gor"(x,y)",
       gand"(x,y)" and gnot"(x)" respectively.

       In library mode, it is in fact usually preferable to use the two basic
       functions which are gcmp"(x,y)" which gives the sign (1, 0, or -1) of
       "x-y", where "x" and "y" must be in R, and gegal"(x,y)" which can be
       applied to any two PARI objects "x" and "y" and gives 1 (i.e. true) if
       they are equal (but not necessarily identical), 0 (i.e. false) other-
       wise.  Particular cases of gegal which should be used are gcmp0"(x)"
       ("x == 0" ?), gcmp1"(x)" ("x == 1" ?), and gcmp_1"(x)" ("x == -1" ?).

       Note that gcmp0"(x)" tests whether "x" is equal to zero, even if "x" is
       not an exact object. To test whether "x" is an exact object which is
       equal to zero, one must use isexactzero.

       Also note that the "gcmp" and "gegal" functions return a C-integer, and
       not a "GEN" like "gle" etc.

       GP accepts the following synonyms for some of the above functions:
       since we thought it might easily lead to confusion, we don't use the
       customary C operators for bitwise "and" or bitwise "or" (use "bitand"
       or "bitor"), hence "|" and "&" are accepted as
	synonyms of "||" and "&&" respectively.	 Also, "<  > " is accepted as
       a synonym for "! = ". On the other hand, " = " is definitely not a syn-
       onym for " == " since it is the assignment statement.

       lex"(x,y)"

       gives the result of a lexicographic comparison between "x" and "y".
       This is to be interpreted in quite a wide sense. For example, the vec-
       tor "[1,3]" will be considered smaller than the longer vector
       "[1,3,-1]" (but of course larger than "[1,2,5]"), i.e. "lex([1,3],
       [1,3,-1])" will return "-1".

       The library syntax is lexcmp"(x,y)".

       sign"(x)"

       sign (0, 1 or "-1") of "x", which must be of type integer, real or
       fraction.

       The library syntax is gsigne"(x)". The result is a "long".

       max"(x,y)" and min"(x,y)"

       creates the maximum and minimum of "x" and "y" when they can be com-
       pared.

       The library syntax is gmax"(x,y)" and gmin"(x,y)".

       vecmax"(x)"

       if "x" is a vector or a matrix, returns the maximum of the elements of
       "x", otherwise returns a copy of "x". Returns "- oo " in the form of
       "-(2^{31}-1)" (or "-(2^{63}-1)" for 64-bit machines) if "x" is empty.

       The library syntax is vecmax"(x)".

       vecmin"(x)"

       if "x" is a vector or a matrix, returns the minimum of the elements of
       "x", otherwise returns a copy of "x". Returns "+ oo " in the form of
       "2^{31}-1" (or "2^{63}-1" for 64-bit machines) if "x" is empty.

       The library syntax is vecmin"(x)".

Conversions and similar elementary functions or commands
       Many of the conversion functions are rounding or truncating operations.
       In this case, if the argument is a rational function, the result is the
       Euclidean quotient of the numerator by the denominator, and if the
       argument is a vector or a matrix, the operation is done componentwise.
       This will not be restated for every function.

       List"({x = []})"

       transforms a (row or column) vector "x" into a list. The only other way
       to create a "t_LIST" is to use the function "listcreate".

       This is useless in library mode.

       Mat"({x = []})"

       transforms the object "x" into a matrix.	 If "x" is not a vector or a
       matrix, this creates a "1 x 1" matrix.  If "x" is a row (resp. column)
       vector, this creates a 1-row (resp.  1-column) matrix. If "x" is
       already a matrix, a copy of "x" is created.

       This function can be useful in connection with the function "concat"
       (see there).

       The library syntax is gtomat"(x)".

       Mod"(x,y,{"flag" = 0})"

	creates the PARI object "(x mod y)", i.e. an integermod or a polmod.
       "y" must be an integer or a polynomial. If "y" is an integer, "x" must
       be an integer, a rational number, or a "p"-adic number compatible with
       the modulus "y". If "y" is a polynomial, "x" must be a scalar (which is
       not a polmod), a polynomial, a rational function, or a power series.

       This function is not the same as "x" "%" "y", the result of which is an
       integer or a polynomial.

       If flag is equal to 1, the modulus of the created result is put on the
       heap and not on the stack, and hence becomes a permanent copy which
       cannot be erased later by garbage collecting (see "Label se:garbage").
       Functions will operate faster on such objects and memory consumption
       will be lower.  On the other hand, care should be taken to avoid creat-
       ing too many such objects.

       Under GP, the same effect can be obtained by assigning the object to a
       GP variable (the value of which is a permanent object for the duration
       of the relevant library function call, and is treated as such). This
       value is subject to garbage collection, since it will be deleted when
       the value changes. This is preferable and the above flag is only
       retained for compatibility reasons (it can still be useful in library
       mode).

       The library syntax is Mod0"(x,y,"flag")". Also available are

       * for flag" = 1": gmodulo"(x,y)".

       * for flag" = 0": gmodulcp"(x,y)".

       Pol"(x,{v = x})"

       transforms the object "x" into a polynomial with main variable "v". If
       "x" is a scalar, this gives a constant polynomial. If "x" is a power
       series, the effect is identical to "truncate" (see there), i.e. it
       chops off the "O(X^k)". If "x" is a vector, this function creates the
       polynomial whose coefficients are given in "x", with "x[1]" being the
       leading coefficient (which can be zero).

       Warning: this is not a substitution function. It is intended to be
       quick and dirty. So if you try "Pol(a,y)" on the polynomial "a = x+y",
       you will get "y+y", which is not a valid PARI object.

       The library syntax is gtopoly"(x,v)", where "v" is a variable number.

       Polrev"(x,{v = x})"

       transform the object "x" into a polynomial with main variable "v". If
       "x" is a scalar, this gives a constant polynomial.  If "x" is a power
       series, the effect is identical to "truncate" (see there), i.e. it
       chops off the "O(X^k)". If "x" is a vector, this function creates the
       polynomial whose coefficients are given in "x", with "x[1]" being the
       constant term. Note that this is the reverse of "Pol" if "x" is a vec-
       tor, otherwise it is identical to "Pol".

       The library syntax is gtopolyrev"(x,v)", where "v" is a variable num-
       ber.

       Qfb"(a,b,c,{D = 0.})"

       creates the binary quadratic form "ax^2+bxy+cy^2". If "b^2-4ac > 0",
       initialize Shanks' distance function to "D".

       The library syntax is Qfb0"(a,b,c,D,"prec")". Also available are
       qfi"(a,b,c)" (when "b^2-4ac < 0"), and qfr"(a,b,c,d)" (when "b^2-4ac >
       0").

       Ser"(x,{v = x})"

       transforms the object "x" into a power series with main variable "v"
       ("x" by default). If "x" is a scalar, this gives a constant power
       series with precision given by the default "serieslength" (correspond-
       ing to the C global variable "precdl"). If "x" is a polynomial, the
       precision is the greatest of "precdl" and the degree of the polynomial.
       If "x" is a vector, the precision is similarly given, and the coeffi-
       cients of the vector are understood to be the coefficients of the power
       series starting from the constant term (i.e. the reverse of the func-
       tion "Pol").

       The warning given for "Pol" applies here: this is not a substitution
       function.

       The library syntax is gtoser"(x,v)", where "v" is a variable number
       (i.e. a C integer).

       Set"({x = []})"

       converts "x" into a set, i.e. into a row vector with strictly increas-
       ing entries. "x" can be of any type, but is most useful when "x" is
       already a vector. The components of "x" are put in canonical form (type
       "t_STR") so as to be easily sorted. To recover an ordinary "GEN" from
       such an element, you can apply "eval" to it.

       The library syntax is gtoset"(x)".

       Str"({x = ""},{"flag" = 0})"

       converts "x" into a character string (type "t_STR", the empty string if
       "x" is omitted). To recover an ordinary "GEN" from a string, apply
       "eval" to it. The arguments of "Str" are evaluated in string context
       (see "Label se:strings"). If flag is set, treat "x" as a filename and
       perform environment expansion on the string. This feature can be used
       to read environment variable values.

	 ? i = 1; Str("x" i)
	 %1 = "x1"
	 ? eval(%)
	 %2 = x1;
	 ? Str("$HOME", 1)
	 %3 = "/home/pari"

       The library syntax is strtoGENstr"(x,"flag")". This function is mostly
       useless in library mode. Use the pair "strtoGEN"/"GENtostr" to convert
       between "char*" and "GEN".

       Vec"({x = []})"

       transforms the object "x" into a row vector. The vector will be with
       one component only, except when "x" is a vector/matrix or a quadratic
       form (in which case the resulting vector is simply the initial object
       considered as a row vector), but more importantly when "x" is a polyno-
       mial or a power series. In the case of a polynomial, the coefficients
       of the vector start with the leading coefficient of the polynomial,
       while for power series only the significant coefficients are taken into
       account, but this time by increasing order of degree.

       The library syntax is gtovec"(x)".

       binary"(x)"

       outputs the vector of the binary digits of "|x|".  Here "x" can be an
       integer, a real number (in which case the result has two components,
       one for the integer part, one for the fractional part) or a vec-
       tor/matrix.

       The library syntax is binaire"(x)".

       bitand"(x,y)"

       bitwise "and" of two integers "x" and "y", that is the integer

	sum" (x_i and y_i) 2^i"

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitand"(x,y)".

       bitneg"(x,{n = -1})"

       bitwise negation of an integer "x", truncated to "n" bits, that is the
       integer

	sum"_{i = 0}^n not(x_i) 2^i"

       The special case "n = -1" means no truncation: an infinite sequence of
       leading 1 is then represented as a negative number.

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitneg"(x)".

       bitnegimply"(x,y)"

       bitwise negated imply of two integers "x" and "y" (or "not" "(x ==>
       y)"), that is the integer

	sum" (x_i and not(y_i)) 2^i"

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitnegimply"(x,y)".

       bitor"(x,y)"

       bitwise (inclusive) "or"
	of two integers "x" and "y", that is the integer

	sum" (x_i or y_i) 2^i"

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitor"(x,y)".

       bittest"(x,n)"

       outputs the "n^{th}" bit of "|x|" starting from the right (i.e. the
       coefficient of "2^n" in the binary expansion of "x").  The result is 0
       or 1. To extract several bits at once as a vector, pass a vector for
       "n".

       The library syntax is bittest"(x,n)", where "n" and the result are
       "long"s.

       bitxor"(x,y)"

       bitwise (exclusive) "or"
	of two integers "x" and "y", that is the integer

	sum" (x_i xor y_i) 2^i"

       Negative numbers behave as if modulo a huge power of 2.

       The library syntax is gbitxor"(x,y)".

       ceil"(x)"

       ceiling of "x". When "x" is in R, the result is the smallest integer
       greater than or equal to "x". Applied to a rational function, ceil(x)
       returns the euclidian quotient of the numerator by the denominator.

       The library syntax is gceil"(x)".

       centerlift"(x,{v})"

       lifts an element "x = a mod n" of Z"/n"Z to "a" in Z, and similarly
       lifts a polmod to a polynomial. This is the same as "lift" except that
       in the particular case of elements of Z"/n"Z, the lift "y" is such that
       "-n/2 < y <= n/2". If "x" is of type fraction, complex, quadratic,
       polynomial, power series, rational function, vector or matrix, the lift
       is done for each coefficient. Real and "p"-adics are forbidden.

       The library syntax is centerlift0"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an
       omitted "v" is coded as "-1". Also available is centerlift"(x)" = "cen-
       terlift0(x,-1)".

       changevar"(x,y)"

       creates a copy of the object "x" where its variables are modified
       according to the permutation specified by the vector "y". For example,
       assume that the variables have been introduced in the order "x", "a",
       "b", "c". Then, if "y" is the vector "[x,c,a,b]", the variable "a" will
       be replaced by "c", "b" by "a", and "c" by "b", "x" being unchanged.
       Note that the permutation must be completely specified, e.g. "[c,a,b]"
       would not work, since this would replace "x" by "c", and leave "a" and
       "b" unchanged (as well as "c" which is the fourth variable of the ini-
       tial list). In particular, the new variable names must be distinct.

       The library syntax is changevar"(x,y)".

       components of a PARI object

       There are essentially three ways to extract the components from a PARI
       object.

       The first and most general, is the function component"(x,n)" which
       extracts the "n^{th}"-component of "x". This is to be understood as
       follows: every PARI type has one or two initial code words. The compo-
       nents are counted, starting at 1, after these code words. In particular
       if "x" is a vector, this is indeed the "n^{th}"-component of "x", if
       "x" is a matrix, the "n^{th}" column, if "x" is a polynomial, the
       "n^{th}" coefficient (i.e. of degree "n-1"), and for power series, the
       "n^{th}" significant coefficient. The use of the function "component"
       implies the knowledge of the structure of the different PARI types,
       which can be recalled by typing "\t" under GP.

       The library syntax is compo"(x,n)", where "n" is a "long".

       The two other methods are more natural but more restricted. The func-
       tion
	polcoeff"(x,n)" gives the coefficient of degree "n" of the polynomial
       or power series "x", with respect to the main variable of "x" (to check
       variable ordering, or to change it, use the function "reorder", see
       "Label se:reorder"). In particular if "n" is less than the valuation of
       "x" or in the case of a polynomial, greater than the degree, the result
       is zero (contrary to "compo" which would send an error message). If "x"
       is a power series and "n" is greater than the largest significant
       degree, then an error message is issued.

       For greater flexibility, vector or matrix types are also accepted for
       "x", and the meaning is then identical with that of "compo".

       Finally note that a scalar type is considered by "polcoeff" as a poly-
       nomial of degree zero.

       The library syntax is truecoeff"(x,n)".

       The third method is specific to vectors or matrices under GP. If "x" is
       a (row or column) vector, then "x[n]" represents the "n^{th}" component
       of "x", i.e. "compo(x,n)". It is more natural and shorter to write. If
       "x" is a matrix, "x[m,n]" represents the coefficient of row "m" and
       column "n" of the matrix, "x[m,]" represents the "m^{th}" row of "x",
       and "x[,n]" represents the "n^{th}" column of "x".

       Finally note that in library mode, the macros coeff and mael are avail-
       able to deal with the non-recursivity of the "GEN" type from the com-
       piler's point of view. See the discussion on typecasts in Chapter 4.

       conj"(x)"

       conjugate of "x". The meaning of this is clear, except that for real
       quadratic numbers, it means conjugation in the real quadratic field.
       This function has no effect on integers, reals, integermods, fractions
       or "p"-adics. The only forbidden type is polmod (see "conjvec" for
       this).

       The library syntax is gconj"(x)".

       conjvec"(x)"

       conjugate vector representation of "x". If "x" is a polmod, equal to
       "Mod""(a,q)", this gives a vector of length degree(q) containing the
       complex embeddings of the polmod if "q" has integral or rational coef-
       ficients, and the conjugates of the polmod if "q" has some integermod
       coefficients. The order is the same as that of the "polroots" func-
       tions. If "x" is an integer or a rational number, the result is "x". If
       "x" is a (row or column) vector, the result is a matrix whose columns
       are the conjugate vectors of the individual elements of "x".

       The library syntax is conjvec"(x,"prec")".

       denominator"(x)"

       lowest denominator of "x". The meaning of this is clear when "x" is a
       rational number or function. When "x" is an integer or a polynomial,
       the result is equal to 1. When "x" is a vector or a matrix, the lowest
       common denominator of the components of "x" is computed. All other
       types are forbidden.

       The library syntax is denom"(x)".

       floor"(x)"

       floor of "x". When "x" is in R, the result is the largest integer
       smaller than or equal to "x". Applied to a rational function, floor(x)
       returns the euclidian quotient of the numerator by the denominator.

       The library syntax is gfloor"(x)".

       frac"(x)"

       fractional part of "x". Identical to "x-floor(x)". If "x" is real, the
       result is in "[0,1[".

       The library syntax is gfrac"(x)".

       imag"(x)"

       imaginary part of "x". When "x" is a quadratic number, this is the
       coefficient of omega in the ``canonical'' integral basis "(1,"omega")".

       The library syntax is gimag"(x)".

       length"(x)"

       number of non-code words in "x" really used (i.e. the effective length
       minus 2 for integers and polynomials). In particular, the degree of a
       polynomial is equal to its length minus 1. If "x" has type "t_STR",
       output number of letters.

       The library syntax is glength"(x)" and the result is a C long.

       lift"(x,{v})"

       lifts an element "x = a mod n" of Z"/n"Z to "a" in Z, and similarly
       lifts a polmod to a polynomial if "v" is omitted.  Otherwise, lifts
       only polmods with main variable "v" (if "v" does not occur in "x",
       lifts only intmods). If "x" is of type fraction, complex, quadratic,
       polynomial, power series, rational function, vector or matrix, the lift
       is done for each coefficient. Forbidden types for "x" are reals and
       "p"-adics.

       The library syntax is lift0"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an omit-
       ted "v" is coded as "-1". Also available is lift"(x)" = "lift0(x,-1)".

       norm"(x)"

       algebraic norm of "x", i.e. the product of "x" with its conjugate (no
       square roots are taken), or conjugates for polmods. For vectors and
       matrices, the norm is taken componentwise and hence is not the
       "L^2"-norm (see "norml2"). Note that the norm of an element of R is its
       square, so as to be compatible with the complex norm.

       The library syntax is gnorm"(x)".

       norml2"(x)"

       square of the "L^2"-norm of "x". "x" must be a (row or column) vector.

       The library syntax is gnorml2"(x)".

       numerator"(x)"

       numerator of "x". When "x" is a rational number or function, the mean-
       ing is clear. When "x" is an integer or a polynomial, the result is "x"
       itself. When "x" is a vector or a matrix, then numerator(x) is defined
       to be "denominator(x)*x". All other types are forbidden.

       The library syntax is numer"(x)".

       numtoperm"(n,k)"

       generates the "k"-th permutation (as a row vector of length "n") of the
       numbers 1 to "n". The number "k" is taken modulo "n!", i.e. inverse
       function of "permtonum".

       The library syntax is permute"(n,k)", where "n" is a "long".

       padicprec"(x,p)"

       absolute "p"-adic precision of the object "x".  This is the minimum
       precision of the components of "x". The result is "VERYBIGINT"
       ("2^{31}-1" for 32-bit machines or "2^{63}-1" for 64-bit machines) if
       "x" is an exact object.

       The library syntax is padicprec"(x,p)" and the result is a "long" inte-
       ger.

       permtonum"(x)"

       given a permutation "x" on "n" elements, gives the number "k" such that
       "x = numtoperm(n,k)", i.e. inverse function of "numtoperm".

       The library syntax is permuteInv"(x)".

       precision"(x,{n})"

       gives the precision in decimal digits of the PARI object "x". If "x" is
       an exact object, the largest single precision integer is returned. If
       "n" is not omitted, creates a new object equal to "x" with a new preci-
       sion "n". This is to be understood as follows:

       For exact types, no change. For "x" a vector or a matrix, the operation
       is done componentwise.

       For real "x", "n" is the number of desired significant decimal digits.
       If "n" is smaller than the precision of "x", "x" is truncated, other-
       wise "x" is extended with zeros.

       For "x" a "p"-adic or a power series, "n" is the desired number of sig-
       nificant "p"-adic or "X"-adic digits, where "X" is the main variable of
       "x".

       Note that the function "precision" never changes the type of the
       result.	In particular it is not possible to use it to obtain a polyno-
       mial from a power series. For that, see "truncate".

       The library syntax is precision0"(x,n)", where "n" is a "long". Also
       available are ggprecision"(x)" (result is a "GEN") and gprec"(x,n)",
       where "n" is a "long".

       random"({N = 2^{31}})"

       gives a random integer between 0 and "N-1". "N" can be arbitrary large.
       This is an internal PARI function and does not depend on the system's
       random number generator. Note that the resulting integer is obtained by
       means of linear congruences and will not be well distributed in arith-
       metic progressions.

       The library syntax is genrand"(N)".

       real"(x)"

       real part of "x". In the case where "x" is a quadratic number, this is
       the coefficient of 1 in the ``canonical'' integral basis "(1,"omega")".

       The library syntax is greal"(x)".

       round"(x,{&e})"

       If "x" is in R, rounds "x" to the nearest integer and sets "e" to the
       number of error bits, that is the binary exponent of the difference
       between the original and the rounded value (the ``fractional part'').
       If the exponent of "x" is too large compared to its precision (i.e. "e
       > 0"), the result is undefined and an error occurs if "e" was not
       given.

       Important remark: note that, contrary to the other truncation func-
       tions, this function operates on every coefficient at every level of a
       PARI object. For example

	"truncate((2.4*X^2-1.7)/(X)) = 2.4*X,"

       whereas

	"round((2.4*X^2-1.7)/(X)) = (2*X^2-2)/(X)."

       An important use of "round" is to get exact results after a long
       approximate computation, when theory tells you that the coefficients
       must be integers.

       The library syntax is grndtoi"(x,&e)", where "e" is a "long" integer.
       Also available is ground"(x)".

       simplify"(x)"

       this function tries to simplify the object "x" as much as it can. The
       simplifications do not concern rational functions (which PARI automati-
       cally tries to simplify), but type changes. Specifically, a complex or
       quadratic number whose imaginary part is exactly equal to 0 (i.e. not a
       real zero) is converted to its real part, and a polynomial of degree
       zero is converted to its constant term. For all types, this of course
       occurs recursively. This function is useful in any case, but in partic-
       ular before the use of arithmetic functions which expect integer argu-
       ments, and not for example a complex number of 0 imaginary part and
       integer real part (which is however printed as an integer).

       The library syntax is simplify"(x)".

       sizebyte"(x)"

       outputs the total number of bytes occupied by the tree representing the
       PARI object "x".

       The library syntax is taille2"(x)" which returns a "long". The function
       taille returns the number of words instead.

       sizedigit"(x)"

       outputs a quick bound for the number of decimal digits of (the compo-
       nents of) "x", off by at most 1. If you want the exact value, you can
       use "length(Str(x))", which is much slower.

       The library syntax is sizedigit"(x)" which returns a "long".

       truncate"(x,{&e})"

       truncates "x" and sets "e" to the number of error bits. When "x" is in
       R, this means that the part after the decimal point is chopped away,
       "e" is the binary exponent of the difference between the original and
       the truncated value (the ``fractional part''). If the exponent of "x"
       is too large compared to its precision (i.e. "e > 0"), the result is
       undefined and an error occurs if "e" was not given. The function
       applies componentwise on rational functions and vector / matrices; "e"
       is then the maximal number of error bits.

       Note a very special use of "truncate": when applied to a power series,
       it transforms it into a polynomial or a rational function with denomi-
       nator a power of "X", by chopping away the "O(X^k)". Similarly, when
       applied to a "p"-adic number, it transforms it into an integer or a
       rational number by chopping away the "O(p^k)".

       The library syntax is gcvtoi"(x,&e)", where "e" is a "long" integer.
       Also available is gtrunc"(x)".

       valuation"(x,p)"

	computes the highest exponent of "p" dividing "x". If "p" is of type
       integer, "x" must be an integer, an integermod whose modulus is divisi-
       ble by "p", a fraction, a "q"-adic number with "q = p", or a polynomial
       or power series in which case the valuation is the minimum of the valu-
       ation of the coefficients.

       If "p" is of type polynomial, "x" must be of type polynomial or ratio-
       nal function, and also a power series if "x" is a monomial. Finally,
       the valuation of a vector, complex or quadratic number is the minimum
       of the component valuations.

       If "x = 0", the result is "VERYBIGINT" ("2^{31}-1" for 32-bit machines
       or "2^{63}-1" for 64-bit machines) if "x" is an exact object. If "x" is
       a "p"-adic numbers or power series, the result is the exponent of the
       zero.  Any other type combinations gives an error.

       The library syntax is ggval"(x,p)", and the result is a "long".

       variable"(x)"

       gives the main variable of the object "x", and "p" if "x" is a "p"-adic
       number. Gives an error if "x" has no variable associated to it. Note
       that this function is useful only in GP, since in library mode the
       function "gvar" is more appropriate.

       The library syntax is gpolvar"(x)". However, in library mode, this
       function should not be used.  Instead, test whether "x" is a "p"-adic
       (type "t_PADIC"), in which case "p" is in "x[2]", or call the function
       gvar"(x)" which returns the variable number of "x" if it exists, "BIG-
       INT" otherwise.

Transcendental functions
       As a general rule, which of course in some cases may have exceptions,
       transcendental functions operate in the following way:

       * If the argument is either an integer, a real, a rational, a complex
       or a quadratic number, it is, if necessary, first converted to a real
       (or complex) number using the current precision held in the default
       "realprecision". Note that only exact arguments are converted, while
       inexact arguments such as reals are not.

       Under GP this is transparent to the user, but when programming in
       library mode, care must be taken to supply a meaningful parameter prec
       as the last argument of the function if the first argument is an exact
       object.	This parameter is ignored if the argument is inexact.

       Note that in library mode the precision argument prec is a word count
       including codewords, i.e. represents the length in words of a real num-
       ber, while under GP the precision (which is changed by the metacommand
       "\p" or using "default(realprecision,...)") is the number of signifi-
       cant decimal digits.

       Note that some accuracies attainable on 32-bit machines cannot be
       attained on 64-bit machines for parity reasons. For example the default
       GP accuracy is 28 decimal digits on 32-bit machines, corresponding to
       prec having the value 5, but this cannot be attained on 64-bit
       machines.

       After possible conversion, the function is computed. Note that even if
       the argument is real, the result may be complex (e.g. "acos(2.0)" or
       "acosh(0.0)"). Note also that the principal branch is always chosen.

       * If the argument is an integermod or a "p"-adic, at present only a few
       functions like "sqrt" (square root), "sqr" (square), "log", "exp", pow-
       ering, "teichmuller" (Teichmueller character) and "agm" (arith-
       metic-geometric mean) are implemented.

       Note that in the case of a 2-adic number, sqr(x) may not be identical
       to "x*x": for example if "x = 1+O(2^5)" and "y = 1+O(2^5)" then "x*y =
       1+O(2^5)" while "sqr(x) = 1+O(2^6)". Here, "x * x" yields the same
       result as sqr(x) since the two operands are known to be identical. The
       same statement holds true for "p"-adics raised to the power "n", where
       "v_p(n) > 0".

       Remark: note that if we wanted to be strictly consistent with the PARI
       philosophy, we should have "x*y = (4 mod 8)" and "sqr(x) = (4 mod 32)"
       when both "x" and "y" are congruent to 2 modulo 4.  However, since
       integermod is an exact object, PARI assumes that the modulus must not
       change, and the result is hence "(0 mod 4)" in both cases. On the other
       hand, "p"-adics are not exact objects, hence are treated differently.

       * If the argument is a polynomial, power series or rational function,
       it is, if necessary, first converted to a power series using the cur-
       rent precision held in the variable "precdl". Under GP this again is
       transparent to the user. When programming in library mode, however, the
       global variable "precdl" must be set before calling the function if the
       argument has an exact type (i.e. not a power series). Here "precdl" is
       not an argument of the function, but a global variable.

       Then the Taylor series expansion of the function around "X = 0" (where
       "X" is the main variable) is computed to a number of terms depending on
       the number of terms of the argument and the function being computed.

       * If the argument is a vector or a matrix, the result is the component-
       wise evaluation of the function. In particular, transcendental func-
       tions on square matrices, which are not implemented in the present ver-
       sion 2.2.0 (see Appendix B however), will have a slightly different
       name if they are implemented some day.

       ^

       If "y" is not of type integer, "x^y" has the same effect as
       "exp(y*ln(x))". It can be applied to "p"-adic numbers as well as to the
       more usual types.

       The library syntax is gpow"(x,y,"prec")".

       Euler

       Euler's constant 0.57721.... Note that "Euler" is one of the few spe-
       cial reserved names which cannot be used for variables (the others are
       "I" and "Pi", as well as all function names).

       The library syntax is mpeuler"("prec")" where prec must be given. Note
       that this creates gamma on the PARI stack, but a copy is also created
       on the heap for quicker computations next time the function is called.

       I

       the complex number  sqrt "{-1}".

       The library syntax is the global variable "gi" (of type "GEN").

       Pi

       the constant Pi (3.14159...).

       The library syntax is mppi"("prec")" where prec must be given. Note
       that this creates Pi on the PARI stack, but a copy is also created on
       the heap for quicker computations next time the function is called.

       abs"(x)"

       absolute value of "x" (modulus if "x" is complex).  Power series and
       rational functions are not allowed. Contrary to most transcendental
       functions, an exact argument is not converted to a real number before
       applying "abs" and an exact result is returned if possible.

	 ? abs(-1)
	 %1 = 1
	 ? abs(3/7 + 4/7*I)
	 %2 = 5/7
	 ? abs(1 + I)
	 %3 = 1.414213562373095048801688724

       If "x" is a polynomial, returns "-x" if the leading coefficient is real
       and negative else returns "x". For a power series, the constant coeffi-
       cient is considered instead.

       The library syntax is gabs"(x,"prec")".

       acos"(x)"

       principal branch of "cos^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Re(acos(x)) belongs
       to [0,"Pi"]". If "x belongs to "R and "|x| > 1", then acos(x) is com-
       plex.

       The library syntax is gacos"(x,"prec")".

       acosh"(x)"

       principal branch of "cosh^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Im(acosh(x))
       belongs to [0,"Pi"]". If "x belongs to "R and "x < 1", then acosh(x) is
       complex.

       The library syntax is gach"(x,"prec")".

       agm"(x,y)"

       arithmetic-geometric mean of "x" and "y". In the case of complex or
       negative numbers, the principal square root is always chosen. "p"-adic
       or power series arguments are also allowed. Note that a "p"-adic agm
       exists only if "x/y" is congruent to 1 modulo "p" (modulo 16 for "p =
       2"). "x" and "y" cannot both be vectors or matrices.

       The library syntax is agm"(x,y,"prec")".

       arg"(x)"

       argument of the complex number "x", such that "-"Pi" < arg(x) <= "Pi.

       The library syntax is garg"(x,"prec")".

       asin"(x)"

       principal branch of "sin^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Re(asin(x)) belongs
       to [-"Pi"/2,"Pi"/2]". If "x belongs to "R and "|x| > 1" then asin(x) is
       complex.

       The library syntax is gasin"(x,"prec")".

       asinh"(x)"

       principal branch of "sinh^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Im(asinh(x))
       belongs to [-"Pi"/2,"Pi"/2]".

       The library syntax is gash"(x,"prec")".

       atan"(x)"

       principal branch of "tan^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Re(atan(x)) belongs
       to  ]-"Pi"/2,"Pi"/2[".

       The library syntax is gatan"(x,"prec")".

       atanh"(x)"

       principal branch of "tanh^{-1}(x)", i.e. such that "Im(atanh(x))
       belongs to  ]-"Pi"/2,"Pi"/2]". If "x belongs to "R and "|x| > 1" then
       atanh(x) is complex.

       The library syntax is gath"(x,"prec")".

       bernfrac"(x)"

       Bernoulli number "B_x", where "B_0 = 1", "B_1 = -1/2", "B_2 = 1/6",...,
       expressed as a rational number.	The argument "x" should be of type
       integer.

       The library syntax is bernfrac"(x)".

       bernreal"(x)"

       Bernoulli number "B_x", as "bernfrac", but "B_x" is returned as a real
       number (with the current precision).

       The library syntax is bernreal"(x,"prec")".

       bernvec"(x)"

       creates a vector containing, as rational numbers, the Bernoulli numbers
       "B_0", "B_2",..., "B_{2x}". These Bernoulli numbers can then be used as
       follows. Assume that this vector has been put into a variable, say
       "bernint". Then you can define under GP:

	 bern(x) =
	 {
	   if (x == 1, return(-1/2));
	   if (x < 0 || x % 2, return(0));
	   bernint[x/2+1]
	 }

       and then bern(k) gives the Bernoulli number of index "k" as a rational
       number, exactly as bernreal(k) gives it as a real number. If you need
       only a few values, calling bernfrac(k) each time will be much more
       efficient than computing the huge vector above.

       The library syntax is bernvec"(x)".

       besseljh"(n,x)"

       "J"-Bessel function of half integral index.  More precisely,
       "besseljh(n,x)" computes "J_{n+1/2}(x)" where "n" must be of type inte-
       ger, and "x" is any element of C. In the present version 2.2.0, this
       function is not very accurate when "x" is small.

       The library syntax is jbesselh"(n,x,"prec")".

       besselk"("nu",x,{"flag" = 0})"

       "K"-Bessel function of index nu (which can be complex) and argument
       "x". Only real and positive arguments "x" are allowed in the present
       version 2.2.0. If flag is equal to 1, uses another implementation of
       this function which is often faster.

       The library syntax is kbessel"("nu",x,"prec")" and
       kbessel2"("nu",x,"prec")" respectively.

       cos"(x)"

       cosine of "x".

       The library syntax is gcos"(x,"prec")".

       cosh"(x)"

       hyperbolic cosine of "x".

       The library syntax is gch"(x,"prec")".

       cotan"(x)"

       cotangent of "x".

       The library syntax is gcotan"(x,"prec")".

       dilog"(x)"

       principal branch of the dilogarithm of "x", i.e. analytic continuation
       of the power series  log "_2(x) = "sum"_{n >= 1}x^n/n^2".

       The library syntax is dilog"(x,"prec")".

       eint1"(x,{n})"

       exponential integral int"_x^ oo (e^{-t})/(t)dt" ("x belongs to "R)

       If "n" is present, outputs the "n"-dimensional vector
       "[eint1(x),...,eint1(nx)]" ("x >= 0"). This is faster than repeatedly
       calling "eint1(i * x)".

       The library syntax is veceint1"(x,n,"prec")". Also available is
       eint1"(x,"prec")".

       erfc"(x)"

       complementary error function "(2/" sqrt Pi")"int"_x^ oo e^{-t^2}dt".

       The library syntax is erfc"(x,"prec")".

       eta"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       Dedekind's eta function, without the "q^{1/24}". This means the follow-
       ing: if "x" is a complex number with positive imaginary part, the
       result is prod"_{n = 1}^ oo (1-q^n)", where "q = e^{2i"Pi" x}". If "x"
       is a power series (or can be converted to a power series) with positive
       valuation, the result is prod"_{n = 1}^ oo (1-x^n)".

       If flag" = 1" and "x" can be converted to a complex number (i.e. is not
       a power series), computes the true eta function, including the leading
       "q^{1/24}".

       The library syntax is eta"(x,"prec")".

       exp"(x)"

       exponential of "x".  "p"-adic arguments with positive valuation are
       accepted.

       The library syntax is gexp"(x,"prec")".

       gammah"(x)"

       gamma function evaluated at the argument "x+1/2". When "x" is an inte-
       ger, this is much faster than using "gamma(x+1/2)".

       The library syntax is ggamd"(x,"prec")".

       gamma"(x)"

       gamma function of "x". In the present version 2.2.0 the "p"-adic gamma
       function is not implemented.

       The library syntax is ggamma"(x,"prec")".

       hyperu"(a,b,x)"

       "U"-confluent hypergeometric function with parameters "a" and "b". The
       parameters "a" and "b" can be complex but the present implementation
       requires "x" to be positive.

       The library syntax is hyperu"(a,b,x,"prec")".

       incgam"(s,x,{y})"

       incomplete gamma function.

       "x" must be positive and "s" real. The result returned is int"_x^ oo
       e^{-t}t^{s-1}dt". When "y" is given, assume (of course without check-
       ing!)  that "y = "Gamma"(s)". For small "x", this will tremendously
       speed up the computation.

       The library syntax is incgam"(s,x,"prec")" and incgam4"(s,x,y,"prec")",
       respectively. There exist also the functions incgam1 and incgam2 which
       are used for internal purposes.

       incgamc"(s,x)"

       complementary incomplete gamma function.

       The arguments "s" and "x" must be positive. The result returned is
       int"_0^x e^{-t}t^{s-1}dt", when "x" is not too large.

       The library syntax is incgam3"(s,x,"prec")".

       log"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       principal branch of the natural logarithm of "x", i.e. such that
       "Im(ln(x)) belongs to  ]-"Pi","Pi"]". The result is complex (with imag-
       inary part equal to Pi) if "x belongs to "R and "x < 0".

       "p"-adic arguments are also accepted for "x", with the convention that
	ln "(p) = 0". Hence in particular  exp "(" ln "(x))/x" will not in
       general be equal to 1 but to a "(p-1)"-th root of unity (or "+-1" if "p
       = 2") times a power of "p".

       If flag is equal to 1, use an agm formula suggested by Mestre, when "x"
       is real, otherwise identical to "log".

       The library syntax is glog"(x,"prec")" or glogagm"(x,"prec")".

       lngamma"(x)"

       principal branch of the logarithm of the gamma function of "x". Can
       have much larger arguments than "gamma" itself.	In the present version
       2.2.0, the "p"-adic "lngamma" function is not implemented.

       The library syntax is glngamma"(x,"prec")".

       polylog"(m,x,{"flag" = 0})"

       one of the different polylogarithms, depending on flag:

       If flag" = 0" or is omitted: "m^th" polylogarithm of "x", i.e. analytic
       continuation of the power series "Li_m(x) = "sum"_{n >= 1}x^n/n^m". The
       program uses the power series when "|x|^2 <= 1/2", and the power series
       expansion in  log "(x)" otherwise. It is valid in a large domain (at
       least "|x| < 230"), but should not be used too far away from the unit
       circle since it is then better to use the functional equation linking
       the value at "x" to the value at "1/x", which takes a trivial form for
       the variant below. Power series, polynomial, rational and vector/matrix
       arguments are allowed.

       For the variants to follow we need a notation: let  Re "_m" denotes  Re
       or  Im  depending whether "m" is odd or even.

       If flag" = 1": modified "m^th" polylogarithm of "x", called "~ D_m(x)"
       in Zagier, defined for "|x| <= 1" by

	 Re "_m("sum"_{k = 0}^{m-1} ((-" log "|x|)^k)/(k!)Li_{m-k}(x) +((-"
       log "|x|)^{m-1})/(m!)" log "|1-x|)."

       If flag" = 2": modified "m^th" polylogarithm of "x", called D_m(x) in
       Zagier, defined for "|x| <= 1" by

	 Re "_m("sum"_{k = 0}^{m-1}((-" log "|x|)^k)/(k!)Li_{m-k}(x)
       -(1)/(2)((-" log "|x|)^m)/(m!))."

       If flag" = 3": another modified "m^th" polylogarithm of "x", called
       P_m(x) in Zagier, defined for "|x| <= 1" by

	 Re "_m("sum"_{k = 0}^{m-1}(2^kB_k)/(k!)(" log "|x|)^kLi_{m-k}(x)
       -(2^{m-1}B_m)/(m!)(" log "|x|)^m)."

       These three functions satisfy the functional equation "f_m(1/x) =
       (-1)^{m-1}f_m(x)".

       The library syntax is polylog0"(m,x,"flag","prec")".

       psi"(x)"

       the psi-function of "x", i.e. the logarithmic derivative
       Gamma"'(x)/"Gamma"(x)".

       The library syntax is gpsi"(x,"prec")".

       sin"(x)"

       sine of "x".

       The library syntax is gsin"(x,"prec")".

       sinh"(x)"

       hyperbolic sine of "x".

       The library syntax is gsh"(x,"prec")".

       sqr"(x)"

       square of "x". This operation is not completely straightforward,
       i.e. identical to "x * x", since it can usually be computed more effi-
       ciently (roughly one-half of the elementary multiplications can be
       saved). Also, squaring a 2-adic number increases its precision. For
       example,

	 ? (1 + O(2^4))^2
	 %1 = 1 + O(2^5)
	 ? (1 + O(2^4)) * (1 + O(2^4))
	 %2 = 1 + O(2^4)

       Note that this function is also called whenever one multiplies two
       objects which are known to be identical, e.g. they are the value of the
       same variable, or we are computing a power.

	 ? x = (1 + O(2^4)); x * x
	 %3 = 1 + O(2^5)
	 ? (1 + O(2^4))^4
	 %4 = 1 + O(2^6)

       (note the difference between %2 and %3 above).

       The library syntax is gsqr"(x)".

       sqrt"(x)"

       principal branch of the square root of "x", i.e. such that
       "Arg(sqrt(x)) belongs to	 ]-"Pi"/2, "Pi"/2]", or in other words such
       that  Re "(sqrt(x)) > 0" or  Re "(sqrt(x)) = 0" and
	Im "(sqrt(x)) >= 0". If "x belongs to "R and "x < 0", then the result
       is complex with positive imaginary part.

       Integermod a prime and "p"-adics are allowed as arguments. In that
       case, the square root (if it exists) which is returned is the one whose
       first "p"-adic digit (or its unique "p"-adic digit in the case of inte-
       germods) is in the interval "[0,p/2]". When the argument is an inte-
       germod a non-prime (or a non-prime-adic), the result is undefined.

       The library syntax is gsqrt"(x,"prec")".

       sqrtn"(x,n,{&z})"

       principal branch of the "n"th root of "x", i.e. such that "Arg(sqrt(x))
       belongs to  ]-"Pi"/n, "Pi"/n]".

       Integermod a prime and "p"-adics are allowed as arguments.

       If "z" is present, it is set to a suitable root of unity allowing to
       recover all the other roots. If it was not possible, z is set to zero.

       The following script computes all roots in all possible cases:

	 sqrtnall(x,n)=
	 {
	   local(V,r,z,r2);
	   r = sqrtn(x,n, &z);
	   if (!z, error("Impossible case in sqrtn"));
	   if (type(x) == "t_INTMOD" || type(x)=="t_PADIC" ,
	     r2 = r*z; n = 1;
	     while (r2!=r, r2*=z;n++));
	   V = vector(n); V[1] = r;
	   for(i=2, n, V[i] = V[i-1]*z);
	   V
	 }
	 addhelp(sqrtnall,"sqrtnall(x,n):compute the vector of nth-roots of x");

       The library syntax is gsqrtn"(x,n,&z,"prec")".

       tan"(x)"

       tangent of "x".

       The library syntax is gtan"(x,"prec")".

       tanh"(x)"

       hyperbolic tangent of "x".

       The library syntax is gth"(x,"prec")".

       teichmuller"(x)"

       Teichmueller character of the "p"-adic number "x".

       The library syntax is teich"(x)".

       theta"(q,z)"

       Jacobi sine theta-function.

       The library syntax is theta"(q,z,"prec")".

       thetanullk"(q,k)"

       "k"-th derivative at "z = 0" of "theta(q,z)".

       The library syntax is thetanullk"(q,k,"prec")", where "k" is a "long".

       weber"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       one of Weber's three "f" functions.  If flag" = 0", returns

	"f(x) = " exp "(-i"Pi"/24)."eta"((x+1)/2)/"eta"(x)   such that	j =
       (f^{24}-16)^3/f^{24},"

       where "j" is the elliptic "j"-invariant	(see the function "ellj").  If
       flag" = 1", returns

	"f_1(x) = "eta"(x/2)/"eta"(x)  such that  j =
       (f_1^{24}+16)^3/f_1^{24}."

       Finally, if flag" = 2", returns

	"f_2(x) = " sqrt "{2}"eta"(2x)/"eta"(x)	 such that  j =
       (f_2^{24}+16)^3/f_2^{24}."

       Note the identities "f^8 = f_1^8+f_2^8" and "ff_1f_2 = " sqrt 2.

       The library syntax is weber0"(x,"flag","prec")", or wf"(x,"prec")",
       wf1"(x,"prec")" or wf2"(x,"prec")".

       zeta"(s)"

       Riemann's zeta function zeta"(s) = "sum"_{n >= 1}n^{-s}", computed
       using the Euler-Maclaurin summation formula, except when "s" is of type
       integer, in which case it is computed using Bernoulli numbers for "s <=
       0" or "s > 0" and even, and using modular forms for "s > 0" and odd.

       The library syntax is gzeta"(s,"prec")".

Arithmetic functions
       These functions are by definition functions whose natural domain of
       definition is either Z (or Z"_{ > 0}"), or sometimes polynomials over a
       base ring. Functions which concern polynomials exclusively will be
       explained in the next section. The way these functions are used is com-
       pletely different from transcendental functions: in general only the
       types integer and polynomial are accepted as arguments. If a vector or
       matrix type is given, the function will be applied on each coefficient
       independently.

       In the present version 2.2.0, all arithmetic functions in the narrow
       sense of the word --- Euler's totient function, the Moebius function,
       the sums over divisors or powers of divisors etc.--- call, after trial
       division by small primes, the same versatile factoring machinery
       described under "factorint". It includes Shanks SQUFOF, Pollard Rho,
       ECM and MPQS stages, and has an early exit option for the functions
       moebius and (the integer function underlying) issquarefree. Note that
       it relies on a (fairly strong) probabilistic primality test: numbers
       found to be strong pseudo-primes after 10 successful trials of the
       Rabin-Miller test are declared primes.

       addprimes"({x = []})"

       adds the primes contained in the vector "x" (or the single integer "x")
       to the table computed upon GP initialization (by "pari_init" in library
       mode), and returns a row vector whose first entries contain all primes
       added by the user and whose last entries have been filled up with 1's.
       In total the returned row vector has 100 components.  Whenever "factor"
       or "smallfact" is subsequently called, first the primes in the table
       computed by "pari_init" will be checked, and then the additional primes
       in this table. If "x" is empty or omitted, just returns the current
       list of extra primes.

       The entries in "x" are not checked for primality. They need only be
       positive integers not divisible by any of the pre-computed primes. It's
       in fact a nice trick to add composite numbers, which for example the
       function "factor(x,0)" was not able to factor. In case the message
       ``impossible inverse modulo "<"some integermod">"'' shows up after-
       wards, you have just stumbled over a non-trivial factor. Note that the
       arithmetic functions in the narrow sense, like eulerphi, do not use
       this extra table.

       The present PARI version 2.2.0 allows up to 100 user-specified primes
       to be appended to the table. This limit may be changed by altering
       "NUMPRTBELT" in file "init.c". To remove primes from the list use
       "removeprimes".

       The library syntax is addprimes"(x)".

       bestappr"(x,k)"

       if "x belongs to "R, finds the best rational approximation to "x" with
       denominator at most equal to "k" using continued fractions.

       The library syntax is bestappr"(x,k)".

       bezout"(x,y)"

       finds "u" and "v" minimal in a natural sense such that "x*u+y*v =
       gcd(x,y)". The arguments must be both integers or both polynomials, and
       the result is a row vector with three components "u", "v", and
       "gcd(x,y)".

       The library syntax is vecbezout"(x,y)" to get the vector, or gbe-
       zout"(x,y, &u, &v)" which gives as result the address of the created
       gcd, and puts the addresses of the corresponding created objects into
       "u" and "v".

       bezoutres"(x,y)"

       as "bezout", with the resultant of "x" and "y" replacing the gcd.

       The library syntax is vecbezoutres"(x,y)" to get the vector, or subre-
       sext"(x,y, &u, &v)" which gives as result the address of the created
       gcd, and puts the addresses of the corresponding created objects into
       "u" and "v".

       bigomega"(x)"

       number of prime divisors of "|x|" counted with multiplicity. "x" must
       be an integer.

       The library syntax is bigomega"(x)", the result is a "long".

       binomial"(x,y)"

       binomial coefficient "\binom x y".  Here "y" must be an integer, but
       "x" can be any PARI object.

       The library syntax is binome"(x,y)", where "y" must be a "long".

       chinese"(x,y)"

       if "x" and "y" are both integermods or both polmods, creates (with the
       same type) a "z" in the same residue class as "x" and in the same
       residue class as "y", if it is possible.

       This function also allows vector and matrix arguments, in which case
       the operation is recursively applied to each component of the vector or
       matrix.	For polynomial arguments, it is applied to each coefficient.
       Finally "chinese(x,x) = x" regardless of the type of "x"; this allows
       vector arguments to contain other data, so long as they are identical
       in both vectors.

       The library syntax is chinois"(x,y)".

       content"(x)"

       computes the gcd of all the coefficients of "x", when this gcd makes
       sense. If "x" is a scalar, this simply returns "x". If "x" is a polyno-
       mial (and by extension a power series), it gives the usual content of
       "x". If "x" is a rational function, it gives the ratio of the contents
       of the numerator and the denominator. Finally, if "x" is a vector or a
       matrix, it gives the gcd of all the entries.

       The library syntax is content"(x)".

       contfrac"(x,{b},{lmax})"

       creates the row vector whose components are the partial quotients of
       the continued fraction expansion of "x", the number of partial quo-
       tients being limited to "lmax".	If "x" is a real number, the expansion
       stops at the last significant partial quotient if "lmax" is omitted.
       "x" can also be a rational function or a power series.

       If a vector "b" is supplied, the numerators will be equal to the coef-
       ficients of "b". The length of the result is then equal to the length
       of "b", unless a partial remainder is encountered which is equal to
       zero. In which case the expansion stops. In the case of real numbers,
       the stopping criterion is thus different from the one mentioned above
       since, if "b" is too long, some partial quotients may not be signifi-
       cant.

       If "b" is an integer, the command is understood as "contfrac(x,lmax)".

       The library syntax is contfrac0"(x,b,lmax)". Also available are
       gboundcf"(x,lmax)", gcf"(x)", or gcf2"(b,x)", where "lmax" is a C inte-
       ger.

       contfracpnqn"(x)"

       when "x" is a vector or a one-row matrix, "x" is considered as the list
       of partial quotients "[a_0,a_1,...,a_n]" of a rational number, and the
       result is the 2 by 2 matrix "[p_n,p_{n-1};q_n,q_{n-1}]" in the standard
       notation of continued fractions, so "p_n/q_n =
       a_0+1/(a_1+...+1/a_n)...)". If "x" is a matrix with two rows
       "[b_0,b_1,...,b_n]" and "[a_0,a_1,...,a_n]", this is then considered as
       a generalized continued fraction and we have similarly "p_n/q_n =
       1/b_0(a_0+b_1/(a_1+...+b_n/a_n)...)". Note that in this case one usu-
       ally has "b_0 = 1".

       The library syntax is pnqn"(x)".

       core"(n,{"flag" = 0})"

       if "n" is a non-zero integer written as "n = df^2" with "d" squarefree,
       returns "d". If flag is non-zero, returns the two-element row vector
       "[d,f]".

       The library syntax is core0"(n,"flag")".	 Also available are core"(n)"
       ( = core"(n,0)") and core2"(n)" ( = core"(n,1)").

       coredisc"(n,{"flag"})"

       if "n" is a non-zero integer written as "n = df^2" with "d" fundamental
       discriminant (including 1), returns "d". If flag is non-zero, returns
       the two-element row vector "[d,f]". Note that if "n" is not congruent
       to 0 or 1 modulo 4, "f" will be a half integer and not an integer.

       The library syntax is coredisc0"(n,"flag")".  Also available are core-
       disc"(n)" ( = coredisc"(n,0)") and coredisc2"(n)" ( = coredisc"(n,1)").

       dirdiv"(x,y)"

       "x" and "y" being vectors of perhaps different lengths but with "y[1] !
       = 0" considered as Dirichlet series, computes the quotient of "x" by
       "y", again as a vector.

       The library syntax is dirdiv"(x,y)".

       direuler"(p = a,b,"expr",{c})"

       computes the Dirichlet series to "b" terms of the Euler product of
       expression expr as "p" ranges through the primes from "a" to "b".  expr
       must be a polynomial or rational function in another variable than "p"
       (say "X") and expr"(X)" is understood as the Dirichlet series (or more
       precisely the local factor) expr"(p^{-s})". If "c" is present, output
       only the first "c" coefficients in the series.

       The library syntax is direuler"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr)"

       dirmul"(x,y)"

       "x" and "y" being vectors of perhaps different lengths considered as
       Dirichlet series, computes the product of "x" by "y", again as a vec-
       tor.

       The library syntax is dirmul"(x,y)".

       divisors"(x)"

       creates a row vector whose components are the positive divisors of the
       integer "x" in increasing order. The factorization of "x" (as output by
       "factor") can be used instead.

       The library syntax is divisors"(x)".

       eulerphi"(x)"

       Euler's phi (totient) function of "|x|", in other words
       "|("Z"/x"Z")^*|". "x" must be of type integer.

       The library syntax is phi"(x)".

       factor"(x,{"lim" = -1})"

       general factorization function.	If "x" is of type integer, rational,
       polynomial or rational function, the result is a two-column matrix, the
       first column being the irreducibles dividing "x" (prime numbers or
       polynomials), and the second the exponents.  If "x" is a vector or a
       matrix, the factoring is done componentwise (hence the result is a vec-
       tor or matrix of two-column matrices). By definition, 0 is factored as
       "0^1".

       If "x" is of type integer or rational, an argument lim can be added,
       meaning that we look only for factors up to lim, or to "primelimit",
       whichever is lowest (except when lim" = 0" where the effect is identi-
       cal to setting lim" = primelimit"). Hence in this case, the remaining
       part is not necessarily prime. See factorint for more information about
       the algorithms used.

       The polynomials or rational functions to be factored must have scalar
       coefficients. In particular PARI does not know how to factor multivari-
       ate polynomials.

       Note that PARI tries to guess in a sensible way over which ring you
       want to factor. Note also that factorization of polynomials is done up
       to multiplication by a constant. In particular, the factors of rational
       polynomials will have integer coefficients, and the content of a poly-
       nomial or rational function is discarded and not included in the fac-
       torization. If you need it, you can always ask for the content explic-
       itly:

	 ? factor(t^2 + 5/2*t + 1)
	 %1 =
	 [2*t + 1 1]

	 [t + 2 1]

	 ? content(t^2 + 5/2*t + 1)
	 %2 = 1/2

       See also factornf.

       The library syntax is factor0"(x,"lim")", where lim is a C integer.
       Also available are factor"(x)" ( = factor0"(x,-1)"), smallfact"(x)" ( =
       factor0"(x,0)").

       factorback"(f,{nf})"

       "f" being any factorization, gives back the factored object. If a sec-
       ond argument nf is supplied, "f" is assumed to be a prime ideal factor-
       ization in the number field nf.	The resulting ideal is given in HNF
       form.

       The library syntax is factorback"(f,"nf")", where an omitted nf is
       entered as "NULL".

       factorcantor"(x,p)"

       factors the polynomial "x" modulo the prime "p", using distinct degree
       plus Cantor-Zassenhaus. The coefficients of "x" must be operation-com-
       patible with Z"/p"Z. The result is a two-column matrix, the first col-
       umn being the irreducible polynomials dividing "x", and the second the
       exponents.  If you want only the degrees of the irreducible polynomials
       (for example for computing an "L"-function), use "factormod(x,p,1)".
       Note that the "factormod" algorithm is usually faster than "factorcan-
       tor".

       The library syntax is factcantor"(x,p)".

       factorff"(x,p,a)"

       factors the polynomial "x" in the field F"_q" defined by the irreduc-
       ible polynomial "a" over F"_p". The coefficients of "x" must be opera-
       tion-compatible with Z"/p"Z. The result is a two-column matrix, the
       first column being the irreducible polynomials dividing "x", and the
       second the exponents. It is recommended to use for the variable of "a"
       (which will be used as variable of a polmod) a name distinct from the
       other variables used, so that a "lift()" of the result will be legible.
       If all the coefficients of "x" are in F"_p", a much faster algorithm is
       applied, using the computation of isomorphisms between finite fields.

       The library syntax is factmod9"(x,p,a)".

       factorial"(x)" or "x!"

       factorial of "x". The expression "x!"  gives a result which is an inte-
       ger, while factorial(x) gives a real number.

       The library syntax is mpfact"(x)" for "x!" and mpfactr"(x,"prec")" for
       factorial(x). "x" must be a "long" integer and not a PARI integer.

       factorint"(n,{"flag" = 0})"

       factors the integer n using a combination of the Shanks SQUFOF and Pol-
       lard Rho method (with modifications due to Brent), Lenstra's ECM (with
       modifications by Montgomery), and MPQS (the latter adapted from the
       LiDIA code with the kind permission of the LiDIA maintainers), as well
       as a search for pure powers with exponents" <= 10". The output is a
       two-column matrix as for "factor".

       This gives direct access to the integer factoring engine called by most
       arithmetical functions. flag is optional; its binary digits mean 1:
       avoid MPQS, 2: skip first stage ECM (we may still fall back to it
       later), 4: avoid Rho and SQUFOF, 8: don't run final ECM (as a result, a
       huge composite may be declared to be prime). Note that a (strong) prob-
       abilistic primality test is used; thus composites might (very rarely)
       not be detected.

       The machinery underlying this function is still in a somewhat experi-
       mental state, but should be much faster on average than pure ECM as
       used by all PARI versions up to 2.0.8, at the expense of heavier memory
       use. You are invited to play with the flag settings and watch the
       internals at work by using GP's "debuglevel" default parameter (level 3
       shows just the outline, 4 turns on time keeping, 5 and above show an
       increasing amount of internal details). If you see anything funny hap-
       pening, please let us know.

       The library syntax is factorint"(n,"flag")".

       factormod"(x,p,{"flag" = 0})"

       factors the polynomial "x" modulo the prime integer "p", using
       Berlekamp. The coefficients of "x" must be operation-compatible with
       Z"/p"Z. The result is a two-column matrix, the first column being the
       irreducible polynomials dividing "x", and the second the exponents. If
       flag is non-zero, outputs only the degrees of the irreducible polynomi-
       als (for example, for computing an "L"-function). A different algorithm
       for computing the mod "p" factorization is "factorcantor" which is
       sometimes faster.

       The library syntax is factormod"(x,p,"flag")". Also available are fact-
       mod"(x,p)" (which is equivalent to factormod"(x,p,0)") and simplefact-
       mod"(x,p)" ( = factormod"(x,p,1)").

       fibonacci"(x)"

       "x^{th}" Fibonacci number.

       The library syntax is fibo"(x)". "x" must be a "long".

       ffinit"(p,n,{v = x})"

       computes a monic polynomial of degree "n" which is irreducible over
       F"_p". For instance if "P = ffinit(3,2,y)", you can represent elements
       in F"_{3^2}" as polmods modulo "P".

       The library syntax is ffinit"(p,n,v)", where "v" is a variable number.

       gcd"(x,y,{"flag" = 0})"

       creates the greatest common divisor of "x" and "y". "x" and "y" can be
       of quite general types, for instance both rational numbers. Vec-
       tor/matrix types are also accepted, in which case the GCD is taken
       recursively on each component. Note that for these types, "gcd" is not
       commutative.

       If flag" = 0", use Euclid's algorithm.

       If flag" = 1", use the modular gcd algorithm ("x" and "y" have to be
       polynomials, with integer coefficients).

       If flag" = 2", use the subresultant algorithm.

       The library syntax is gcd0"(x,y,"flag")". Also available are
       ggcd"(x,y)", modulargcd"(x,y)", and srgcd"(x,y)" corresponding to flag"
       = 0", 1 and 2 respectively.

       hilbert"(x,y,{p})"

       Hilbert symbol of "x" and "y" modulo "p". If "x" and "y" are of type
       integer or fraction, an explicit third parameter "p" must be supplied,
       "p = 0" meaning the place at infinity.  Otherwise, "p" needs not be
       given, and "x" and "y" can be of compatible types integer, fraction,
       real, integermod a prime (result is undefined if the modulus is not
       prime), or "p"-adic.

       The library syntax is hil"(x,y,p)".

       isfundamental"(x)"

       true (1) if "x" is equal to 1 or to the discriminant of a quadratic
       field, false (0) otherwise.

       The library syntax is gisfundamental"(x)", but the simpler function
       isfundamental"(x)" which returns a "long" should be used if "x" is
       known to be of type integer.

       isprime"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       if flag" = 0" (default), true (1) if "x" is a strong pseudo-prime for
       10 randomly chosen bases, false (0) otherwise.

       If flag" = 1", use Pocklington-Lehmer ``P-1'' test. true (1) if "x" is
       prime, false (0) otherwise.

       If flag" = 2", use Pocklington-Lehmer ``P-1'' test and output a primal-
       ity certificate as follows: return 0 if "x" is composite, 1 if "x" is a
       small prime (currently strictly less than "341 550 071 728 321"), and a
       matrix if "x" is a large prime.	The matrix has three columns. The
       first contains the prime factors "p", the second the corresponding ele-
       ments "a_p" as in Proposition 8.3.1 in GTM 138, and the third the out-
       put of isprime(p,2).

       In the two last cases, the algorithm fails if one of the (strong
       pseudo-)prime factors is not prime, but it should be exceedingly rare.

       The library syntax is gisprime"(x,"flag")", but the simpler function
       isprime"(x)" which returns a "long" should be used if "x" is known to
       be of type integer. Also available is plisprime"(N,"flag")", corre-
       sponding to gisprime"(x,"flag"+1)" if "x" is known to be of type inte-
       ger.

       ispseudoprime"(x)"

       true (1) if "x" is a strong pseudo-prime for a randomly chosen base,
       false (0) otherwise.

       The library syntax is gispsp"(x)", but the simpler function ispsp"(x)"
       which returns a "long" should be used if "x" is known to be of type
       integer.

       issquare"(x,{&n})"

       true (1) if "x" is square, false (0) if not. "x" can be of any type. If
       "n" is given and an exact square root had to be computed in the check-
       ing process, puts that square root in "n". This is in particular the
       case when "x" is an integer or a polynomial. This is not the case for
       intmods (use quadratic reciprocity) or series (only check the leading
       coefficient).

       The library syntax is gcarrecomplet"(x,&n)". Also available is gcar-
       reparfait"(x)".

       issquarefree"(x)"

       true (1) if "x" is squarefree, false (0) if not.	 Here "x" can be an
       integer or a polynomial.

       The library syntax is gissquarefree"(x)", but the simpler function
       issquarefree"(x)" which returns a "long" should be used if "x" is known
       to be of type integer. This issquarefree is just the square of the Moe-
       bius function, and is computed as a multiplicative arithmetic function
       much like the latter.

       kronecker"(x,y)"

       Kronecker (i.e. generalized Legendre) symbol "((x)/(y))". "x" and "y"
       must be of type integer.

       The library syntax is kronecker"(x,y)", the result (0 or "+- 1") is a
       "long".

       lcm"(x,y)"

       least common multiple of "x" and "y", i.e. such that "lcm(x,y)*gcd(x,y)
       = abs(x*y)".

       The library syntax is glcm"(x,y)".

       moebius"(x)"

       Moebius mu-function of "|x|". "x" must be of type integer.

       The library syntax is mu"(x)", the result (0 or "+- 1") is a "long".

       nextprime"(x)"

       finds the smallest prime greater than or equal to "x". "x" can be of
       any real type. Note that if "x" is a prime, this function returns "x"
       and not the smallest prime strictly larger than "x".

       The library syntax is nextprime"(x)".

       numdiv"(x)"

       number of divisors of "|x|". "x" must be of type integer, and the
       result is a "long".

       The library syntax is numbdiv"(x)".

       omega"(x)"

       number of distinct prime divisors of "|x|". "x" must be of type inte-
       ger.

       The library syntax is omega"(x)", the result is a "long".

       precprime"(x)"

       finds the largest prime less than or equal to "x". "x" can be of any
       real type. Returns 0 if "x <= 1".  Note that if "x" is a prime, this
       function returns "x" and not the largest prime strictly smaller than
       "x".

       The library syntax is precprime"(x)".

       prime"(x)"

       the "x^{th}" prime number, which must be among the precalculated
       primes.

       The library syntax is prime"(x)". "x" must be a "long".

       primes"(x)"

       creates a row vector whose components are the first "x" prime numbers,
       which must be among the precalculated primes.

       The library syntax is primes"(x)". "x" must be a "long".

       qfbclassno"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       class number of the quadratic field of discriminant "x". In the present
       version 2.2.0, a simple algorithm is used for "x > 0", so "x" should
       not be too large (say "x < 10^7") for the time to be reasonable. On the
       other hand, for "x < 0" one can reasonably compute classno("x") for
       "|x| < 10^{25}", since the method used is Shanks' method which is in
       "O(|x|^{1/4})". For larger values of "|D|", see "quadclassunit".

       If flag" = 1", compute the class number using Euler products and the
       functional equation. However, it is in "O(|x|^{1/2})".

       Important warning. For "D < 0", this function often gives incorrect
       results when the class group is non-cyclic, because the authors were
       too lazy to implement Shanks' method completely. It is therefore
       strongly recommended to use either the version with flag" = 1", the
       function "qfbhclassno(-x)" if "x" is known to be a fundamental discrim-
       inant, or the function "quadclassunit".

       The library syntax is qfbclassno0"(x,"flag")". Also available are
       classno"(x)" ( = qfbclassno"(x)"), classno2"(x)" ( = qfb-
       classno"(x,1)"), and finally there exists the function hclassno"(x)"
       which computes the class number of an imaginary quadratic field by
       counting reduced forms, an "O(|x|)" algorithm. See also "qfbhclassno".

       qfbcompraw"(x,y)"

       composition of the binary quadratic forms "x" and "y", without reduc-
       tion of the result. This is useful e.g. to compute a generating element
       of an ideal.

       The library syntax is compraw"(x,y)".

       qfbhclassno"(x)"

       Hurwitz class number of "x", where "x" is non-negative and congruent to
       0 or 3 modulo 4. See also "qfbclassno".

       The library syntax is hclassno"(x)".

       qfbnucomp"(x,y,l)"

       composition of the primitive positive definite binary quadratic forms
       "x" and "y" using the NUCOMP and NUDUPL algorithms of Shanks (A la
       Atkin). "l" is any positive constant, but for optimal speed, one should
       take "l = |D|^{1/4}", where "D" is the common discriminant of "x" and
       "y". When "x" and "y" do not have the same discriminant, the result is
       undefined.

       The library syntax is nucomp"(x,y,l)". The auxiliary function
       nudupl"(x,l)" should be used instead for speed when "x = y".

       qfbnupow"(x,n)"

       "n"-th power of the primitive positive definite binary quadratic form
       "x" using the NUCOMP and NUDUPL algorithms (see "qfbnucomp").

       The library syntax is nupow"(x,n)".

       qfbpowraw"(x,n)"

       "n"-th power of the binary quadratic form "x", computed without doing
       any reduction (i.e. using "qfbcompraw").	 Here "n" must be non-negative
       and "n < 2^{31}".

       The library syntax is powraw"(x,n)" where "n" must be a "long" integer.

       qfbprimeform"(x,p)"

       prime binary quadratic form of discriminant "x" whose first coefficient
       is the prime number "p". By abuse of notation, "p = 1" is a valid spe-
       cial case which returns the unit form. Returns an error if "x" is not a
       quadratic residue mod "p". In the case where "x > 0", the ``distance''
       component of the form is set equal to zero according to the current
       precision.

       The library syntax is primeform"(x,p,"prec")", where the third variable
       prec is a "long", but is only taken into account when "x > 0".

       qfbred"(x,{"flag" = 0},{D},{"isqrtD"},{"sqrtD"})"

       reduces the binary quadratic form "x" (updating Shanks's distance func-
       tion if "x" is indefinite). The binary digits of flag are toggles mean-
       ing

	 1: perform a single reduction step

	 2: don't update Shanks's distance

       "D", isqrtD, sqrtD, if present, supply the values of the discriminant,
       "\lfloor " sqrt "{D}\rfloor", and  sqrt "{D}" respectively (no checking
       is done of these facts). If "D < 0" these values are useless, and all
       references to Shanks's distance are irrelevant.

       The library syntax is qfbred0"(x,"flag",D,"isqrtD","sqrtD")". Use
       "NULL" to omit any of "D", isqrtD, sqrtD.

       Also available are

       redimag"(x)" ( = qfbred"(x)" where "x" is definite),

       and for indefinite forms:

       redreal"(x)" ( = qfbred"(x)"),

       rhoreal"(x)" ( = qfbred"(x,1)"),

       redrealnod"(x,sq)" ( = qfbred"(x,2,,isqrtD)"),

       rhorealnod"(x,sq)" ( = qfbred"(x,3,,isqrtD)").

       quadclassunit"(D,{"flag" = 0},{"tech" = []})"

       Buchmann-McCurley's sub-exponential algorithm for computing the class
       group of a quadratic field of discriminant "D". If "D" is not fundamen-
       tal, the function may or may not be defined, but usually is, and often
       gives the right answer (a warning is issued). The more general function
       "bnrinit" should be used to compute the class group of an order.

       This function should be used instead of "qfbclassno" or "quadregula"
       when "D < -10^{25}", "D > 10^{10}", or when the structure is wanted.

       If flag is non-zero and "D > 0", computes the narrow class group and
       regulator, instead of the ordinary (or wide) ones. In the current ver-
       sion 2.2.0, this doesn't work at all : use the general function "bnf-
       narrow".

       Optional parameter tech is a row vector of the form "[c_1,c_2]", where
       "c_1" and "c_2" are positive real numbers which control the execution
       time and the stack size. To get maximum speed, set "c_2 = c". To get a
       rigorous result (under GRH) you must take "c_2 = 6". Reasonable values
       for "c" are between 0.1 and 2.

       The result of this function is a vector "v" with 4 components if "D <
       0", and 5 otherwise. The correspond respectively to

       * "v[1]" : the class number

       * "v[2]" : a vector giving the structure of the class group as a prod-
       uct of cyclic groups;

       * "v[3]" : a vector giving generators of those cyclic groups (as binary
       quadratic forms).

       * "v[4]" : (omitted if "D < 0") the regulator, computed to an accuracy
       which is the maximum of an internal accuracy determined by the program
       and the current default (note that once the regulator is known to a
       small accuracy it is trivial to compute it to very high accuracy, see
       the tutorial).

       * "v[5]" : a measure of the correctness of the result. If it is close
       to 1, the result is correct (under GRH). If it is close to a larger
       integer, this shows that the class number is off by a factor equal to
       this integer, and you must start again with a larger value for "c_1" or
       a different random seed. In this case, a warning message is printed.

       The library syntax is quadclassunit0"(D,"flag",tech)". Also available
       are buchimag"(D,c_1,c_2)" and buchreal"(D,"flag",c_1,c_2)".

       quaddisc"(x)"

       discriminant of the quadratic field Q"(" sqrt "{x})", where "x belongs
       to "Q.

       The library syntax is quaddisc"(x)".

       quadhilbert"(D,{"flag" = 0})"

       relative equation defining the Hilbert class field of the quadratic
       field of discriminant "D".  If flag is non-zero and "D < 0", outputs
       "["form","root"("form")]" (to be used for constructing subfields). If
       flag is non-zero and "D > 0", try hard to get the best modulus.	Uses
       complex multiplication in the imaginary case and Stark units in the
       real case.

       The library syntax is quadhilbert"(D,"flag","prec")".

       quadgen"(x)"

       creates the quadratic number omega" = (a+" sqrt "{x})/2" where "a = 0"
       if "x = 0 mod 4", "a = 1" if "x = 1 mod 4", so that "(1,"omega")" is an
       integral basis for the quadratic order of discriminant "x". "x" must be
       an integer congruent to 0 or 1 modulo 4.

       The library syntax is quadgen"(x)".

       quadpoly"(D,{v = x})"

       creates the ``canonical'' quadratic polynomial (in the variable "v")
       corresponding to the discriminant "D", i.e. the minimal polynomial of
       quadgen(x). "D" must be an integer congruent to 0 or 1 modulo 4.

       The library syntax is quadpoly0"(x,v)".

       quadray"(D,f,{"flag" = 0})"

       relative equation for the ray class field of conductor "f" for the qua-
       dratic field of discriminant "D" (which can also be a "bnf"), using
       analytic methods.

       For "D < 0", uses the sigma function. flag has the following meaning:
       if it's an odd integer, outputs instead the vector of "["ideal", "cor-
       responding root"]". It can also be a two-component vector
       "["lambda","flag"]", where flag is as above and lambda is the technical
       element of "bnf" necessary for Schertz's method. In that case, returns
       0 if lambda is not suitable.

       For "D > 0", uses Stark's conjecture. If flag is non-zero, try hard to
       get the best modulus. The function may fail with the following message

	 "Cannot find a suitable modulus in FindModulus"

       See "bnrstark" for more details about the real case.

       The library syntax is quadray"(D,f,"flag")".

       quadregulator"(x)"

       regulator of the quadratic field of positive discriminant "x". Returns
       an error if "x" is not a discriminant (fundamental or not) or if "x" is
       a square. See also "quadclassunit" if "x" is large.

       The library syntax is regula"(x,"prec")".

       quadunit"(x)"

       fundamental unit of the real quadratic field Q"(" sqrt " x)" where  "x"
       is the positive discriminant of the field. If "x" is not a fundamental
       discriminant, this probably gives the fundamental unit of the corre-
       sponding order. "x" must be of type integer, and the result is a qua-
       dratic number.

       The library syntax is fundunit"(x)".

       removeprimes"({x = []})"

       removes the primes listed in "x" from the prime number table. In par-
       ticular "removeprimes(addprimes)" empties the extra prime table. "x"
       can also be a single integer. List the current extra primes if "x" is
       omitted.

       The library syntax is removeprimes"(x)".

       sigma"(x,{k = 1})"

       sum of the "k^{th}" powers of the positive divisors of "|x|". "x" must
       be of type integer.

       The library syntax is sumdiv"(x)" ( = sigma"(x)") or gsumdivk"(x,k)" (
       = sigma"(x,k)"), where "k" is a C long integer.

       sqrtint"(x)"

       integer square root of "x", which must be of PARI type integer. The
       result is non-negative and rounded towards zero. A negative "x" is
       allowed, and the result in that case is "I*sqrtint(-x)".

       The library syntax is racine"(x)".

       znlog"(x,g)"

       "g" must be a primitive root mod a prime "p", and the result is the
       discrete log of "x" in the multiplicative group "("Z"/p"Z")^*". This
       function using a simple-minded baby-step/giant-step approach and
       requires "O(" sqrt "{p})" storage, hence it cannot be used for "p"
       greater than about "10^{13}".

       The library syntax is znlog"(x,g)".

       znorder"(x)"

       "x" must be an integer mod "n", and the result is the order of "x" in
       the multiplicative group "("Z"/n"Z")^*". Returns an error if "x" is not
       invertible.

       The library syntax is order"(x)".

       znprimroot"(x)"

       returns a primitive root of "x", where "x" is a prime power.

       The library syntax is gener"(x)".

       znstar"(n)"

       gives the structure of the multiplicative group "("Z"/n"Z")^*" as a
       3-component row vector "v", where "v[1] = "phi"(n)" is the order of
       that group, "v[2]" is a "k"-component row-vector "d" of integers "d[i]"
       such that "d[i] > 1" and "d[i] | d[i-1]" for "i >= 2" and "("Z"/n"Z")^*
       ~  "prod"_{i = 1}^k("Z"/d[i]"Z")", and "v[3]" is a "k"-component row
       vector giving generators of the image of the cyclic groups Z"/d[i]"Z.

       The library syntax is znstar"(n)".

Functions related to elliptic curves
       We have implemented a number of functions which are useful for number
       theorists working on elliptic curves. We always use Tate's notations.
       The functions assume that the curve is given by a general Weierstrass
       model

	" y^2+a_1xy+a_3y = x^3+a_2x^2+a_4x+a_6, "

       where a priori the "a_i" can be of any scalar type. This curve can be
       considered as a five-component vector "E = [a1,a2,a3,a4,a6]". Points on
       "E" are represented as two-component vectors "[x,y]", except for the
       point at infinity, i.e. the identity element of the group law, repre-
       sented by the one-component vector "[0]".

       It is useful to have at one's disposal more information. This is given
       by the function "ellinit" (see there), which usually gives a 19 compo-
       nent vector (which we will call a long vector in this section). If a
       specific flag is added, a vector with only 13 component will be output
       (which we will call a medium vector). A medium vector just gives the
       first 13 components of the long vector corresponding to the same curve,
       but is of course faster to compute. The following member functions are
       available to deal with the output of "ellinit":

	 "a1"--"a6", "b2"--"b8", "c4"--"c6"  : coefficients of the elliptic
       curve.

	 "area"	 :    volume of the complex lattice defining "E".

	 "disc"	 :   discriminant of the curve.

	 "j"	 :   "j"-invariant of the curve.

	 "omega" :   "["omega"_1,"omega"_2]", periods forming a basis of the
       complex lattice defining "E" (omega"_1" is the

			  real period, and omega"_2/"omega"_1" belongs to
       Poincare's half-plane).

	 "eta"	 :   quasi-periods "["eta"_1, "eta"_2]", such that
       eta"_1"omega"_2-"eta"_2"omega"_1 = i"Pi.

	 "roots" :   roots of the associated Weierstrass equation.

	 "tate"	 :   "[u^2,u,v]" in the notation of Tate.

	 "w"  :	  Mestre's "w" (this is technical).

       Their use is best described by an example: assume that "E" was output
       by "ellinit", then typing "E.disc" will retrieve the curve's discrimi-
       nant. The member functions "area", "eta" and "omega" are only available
       for curves over Q. Conversely, "tate" and "w" are only available for
       curves defined over Q"_p".

       Some functions, in particular those relative to height computations
       (see "ellheight") require also that the curve be in minimal Weierstrass
       form. This is achieved by the function "ellglobalred".

       All functions related to elliptic curves share the prefix "ell", and
       the precise curve we are interested in is always the first argument, in
       either one of the three formats discussed above, unless otherwise spec-
       ified. For instance, in functions which do not use the extra informa-
       tion given by long vectors, the curve can be given either as a five-
       component vector, or by one of the longer vectors computed by
       "ellinit".

       elladd"(E,z1,z2)"

       sum of the points "z1" and "z2" on the elliptic curve corresponding to
       the vector "E".

       The library syntax is addell"(E,z1,z2)".

       ellak"(E,n)"

       computes the coefficient "a_n" of the "L"-function of the elliptic
       curve "E", i.e. in principle coefficients of a newform of weight 2
       assuming Taniyama-Weil conjecture (which is now known to hold in full
       generality thanks to the work of Breuil, Conrad, Diamond, Taylor and
       Wiles). "E" must be a medium or long vector of the type given by
       "ellinit". For this function to work for every "n" and not just those
       prime to the conductor, "E" must be a minimal Weierstrass equation. If
       this is not the case, use the function "ellglobalred" first before
       using "ellak".

       The library syntax is akell"(E,n)".

       ellan"(E,n)"

       computes the vector of the first "n" "a_k" corresponding to the ellip-
       tic curve "E". All comments in "ellak" description remain valid.

       The library syntax is anell"(E,n)", where "n" is a C integer.

       ellap"(E,p,{"flag" = 0})"

       computes the "a_p" corresponding to the elliptic curve "E" and the
       prime number "p". These are defined by the equation "#E("F"_p) = p+1 -
       a_p", where "#E("F"_p)" stands for the number of points of the curve
       "E" over the finite field F"_p". When flag is 0, this uses the baby-
       step giant-step method and a trick due to Mestre. This runs in time
       "O(p^{1/4})" and requires "O(p^{1/4})" storage, hence becomes unreason-
       able when "p" has about 30 digits.

       If flag is 1, computes the "a_p" as a sum of Legendre symbols. This is
       slower than the previous method as soon as "p" is greater than 100,
       say.

       No checking is done that "p" is indeed prime. "E" must be a medium or
       long vector of the type given by "ellinit", defined over Q, F"_p" or
       Q"_p". "E" must be given by a Weierstrass equation minimal at "p".

       The library syntax is ellap0"(E,p,"flag")". Also available are
       apell"(E,p)", corresponding to flag" = 0", and apell2"(E,p)" (flag" =
       1").

       ellbil"(E,z1,z2)"

       if "z1" and "z2" are points on the elliptic curve "E", this function
       computes the value of the canonical bilinear form on "z1", "z2":

	" ellheight(E,z1+z2) - ellheight(E,z1) - ellheight(E,z2) "

       where "+" denotes of course addition on "E". In addition, "z1" or "z2"
       (but not both) can be vectors or matrices. Note that this is equal to
       twice some normalizations. "E" is assumed to be integral, given by a
       minimal model.

       The library syntax is bilhell"(E,z1,z2,"prec")".

       ellchangecurve"(E,v)"

       changes the data for the elliptic curve "E" by changing the coordinates
       using the vector "v = [u,r,s,t]", i.e. if "x'" and "y'" are the new
       coordinates, then "x = u^2x'+r", "y = u^3y'+su^2x'+t".  The vector "E"
       must be a medium or long vector of the type given by "ellinit".

       The library syntax is coordch"(E,v)".

       ellchangepoint"(x,v)"

       changes the coordinates of the point or vector of points "x" using the
       vector "v = [u,r,s,t]", i.e. if "x'" and "y'" are the new coordinates,
       then "x = u^2x'+r", "y = u^3y'+su^2x'+t" (see also "ellchangecurve").

       The library syntax is pointch"(x,v)".

       elleisnum"(E,k,{"flag" = 0})"

       "E" being an elliptic curve as output by "ellinit" (or, alternatively,
       given by a 2-component vector "["omega"_1,"omega"_2]"), and "k" being
       an even positive integer, computes the numerical value of the Eisen-
       stein series of weight "k" at "E". When flag is non-zero and "k = 4" or
       6, returns "g_2" or "g_3" with the correct normalization.

       The library syntax is elleisnum"(E,k,"flag")".

       elleta"(om)"

       returns the two-component row vector "["eta"_1,"eta"_2]" of quasi-peri-
       ods associated to "om = ["omega"_1, "omega"_2]"

       The library syntax is elleta"(om, "prec")"

       ellglobalred"(E)"

       calculates the arithmetic conductor, the global minimal model of "E"
       and the global Tamagawa number "c". Here "E" is an elliptic curve given
       by a medium or long vector of the type given by "ellinit", and is sup-
       posed to have all its coefficients "a_i" in Q. The result is a 3 compo-
       nent vector "[N,v,c]". "N" is the arithmetic conductor of the curve,
       "v" is itself a vector "[u,r,s,t]" with rational components. It gives a
       coordinate change for "E" over Q such that the resulting model has
       integral coefficients, is everywhere minimal, "a_1" is 0 or 1, "a_2" is
       0, 1 or "-1" and "a_3" is 0 or 1. Such a model is unique, and the vec-
       tor "v" is unique if we specify that "u" is positive. To get the new
       model, simply type "ellchangecurve(E,v)". Finally "c" is the product of
       the local Tamagawa numbers "c_p", a quantity which enters in the Birch
       and Swinnerton-Dyer conjecture.

       The library syntax is globalreduction"(E)".

       ellheight"(E,z,{"flag" = 0})"

       global Neron-Tate height of the point "z" on the elliptic curve "E".
       The vector "E" must be a long vector of the type given by "ellinit",
       with flag" = 1". If flag" = 0", this computation is done using sigma
       and theta-functions and a trick due to J.  Silverman. If flag" = 1",
       use Tate's "4^n" algorithm, which is much slower.  "E" is assumed to be
       integral, given by a minimal model.

       The library syntax is ellheight0"(E,z,"flag","prec")". The Archimedean
       contribution alone is given by the library function hell"(E,z,"prec")".
       Also available are ghell"(E,z,"prec")" (flag" = 0") and
       ghell2"(E,z,"prec")" (flag" = 1").

       ellheightmatrix"(E,x)"

       "x" being a vector of points, this function outputs the Gram matrix of
       "x" with respect to the Neron-Tate height, in other words, the "(i,j)"
       component of the matrix is equal to "ellbil(E,x[i],x[j])". The rank of
       this matrix, at least in some approximate sense, gives the rank of the
       set of points, and if "x" is a basis of the Mordell-Weil group of "E",
       its determinant is equal to the regulator of "E". Note that this matrix
       should be divided by 2 to be in accordance with certain normalizations.
       "E" is assumed to be integral, given by a minimal model.

       The library syntax is mathell"(E,x,"prec")".

       ellinit"(E,{"flag" = 0})"

       computes some fixed data concerning the elliptic curve given by the
       five-component vector "E", which will be essential for most further
       computations on the curve. The result is a 19-component vector E
       (called a long vector in this section), shortened to 13 components
       (medium vector) if flag" = 1". Both contain the following information
       in the first 13 components:

	" a_1,a_2,a_3,a_4,a_6,b_2,b_4,b_6,b_8,c_4,c_6,"Delta",j."

       In particular, the discriminant is "E[12]" (or "E.disc"), and the
       "j"-invariant is "E[13]" (or "E.j").

       The other six components are only present if flag is 0 (or omitted!).
       Their content depends on whether the curve is defined over R or not:

       * When "E" is defined over R, "E[14]" ("E.roots") is a vector whose
       three components contain the roots of the associated Weierstrass equa-
       tion. If the roots are all real, then they are ordered by decreasing
       value. If only one is real, it is the first component of "E[14]".

       "E[15]" ("E.omega[1]") is the real period of "E" (integral of
       "dx/(2y+a_1x+a_3)" over the connected component of the identity element
       of the real points of the curve), and "E[16]" ("E.omega[2]") is a com-
       plex period. In other words, omega"_1 = E[15]" and omega"_2 = E[16]"
       form a basis of the complex lattice defining "E" ("E.omega"), with tau"
       = ("omega"_2)/("omega"_1)" having positive imaginary part.

       "E[17]" and "E[18]" are the corresponding values eta"_1" and eta"_2"
       such that eta"_1"omega"_2-"eta"_2"omega"_1 = i"Pi, and both can be
       retrieved by typing "E.eta" (as a row vector whose components are the
       eta"_i").

       Finally, "E[19]" ("E.area") is the volume of the complex lattice defin-
       ing "E".

       * When "E" is defined over Q"_p", the "p"-adic valuation of "j" must be
       negative. Then "E[14]" ("E.roots") is the vector with a single compo-
       nent equal to the "p"-adic root of the associated Weierstrass equation
       corresponding to "-1" under the Tate parametrization.

       "E[15]" is equal to the square of the "u"-value, in the notation of
       Tate.

       "E[16]" is the "u"-value itself, if it belongs to Q"_p", otherwise
       zero.

       "E[17]" is the value of Tate's "q" for the curve "E".

       "E.tate" will yield the three-component vector "[u^2,u,q]".

       "E[18]" ("E.w") is the value of Mestre's "w" (this is technical), and
       "E[19]" is arbitrarily set equal to zero.

       For all other base fields or rings, the last six components are arbi-
       trarily set equal to zero (see also the description of member functions
       related to elliptic curves at the beginning of this section).

       The library syntax is ellinit0"(E,"flag","prec")". Also available are
       initell"(E,"prec")" (flag" = 0") and smallinitell"(E,"prec")" (flag" =
       1").

       ellisoncurve"(E,z)"

       gives 1 (i.e. true) if the point "z" is on the elliptic curve "E", 0
       otherwise. If "E" or "z" have imprecise coefficients, an attempt is
       made to take this into account, i.e. an imprecise equality is checked,
       not a precise one.

       The library syntax is oncurve"(E,z)", and the result is a "long".

       ellj"(x)"

       elliptic "j"-invariant. "x" must be a complex number with positive
       imaginary part, or convertible into a power series or a "p"-adic number
       with positive valuation.

       The library syntax is jell"(x,"prec")".

       elllocalred"(E,p)"

       calculates the Kodaira type of the local fiber of the elliptic curve
       "E" at the prime "p".  "E" must be given by a medium or long vector of
       the type given by "ellinit", and is assumed to have all its coeffi-
       cients "a_i" in Z. The result is a 4-component vector "[f,kod,v,c]".
       Here "f" is the exponent of "p" in the arithmetic conductor of "E", and
       "kod" is the Kodaira type which is coded as follows:

       1 means good reduction (type I"_0"), 2, 3 and 4 mean types II, III and
       IV respectively, "4+"nu with nu" > 0" means type I"_"nu; finally the
       opposite values "-1", "-2", etc. refer to the starred types I"_0^*",
       II"^*", etc. The third component "v" is itself a vector "[u,r,s,t]"
       giving the coordinate changes done during the local reduction. Nor-
       mally, this has no use if "u" is 1, that is, if the given equation was
       already minimal.	 Finally, the last component "c" is the local Tamagawa
       number "c_p".

       The library syntax is localreduction"(E,p)".

       elllseries"(E,s,{A = 1})"

       "E" being a medium or long vector given by "ellinit", this computes the
       value of the L-series of "E" at "s". It is assumed that "E" is a mini-
       mal model over Z and that the curve is a modular elliptic curve. The
       optional parameter "A" is a cutoff point for the integral, which must
       be chosen close to 1 for best speed. The result must be independent of
       "A", so this allows some internal checking of the function.

       Note that if the conductor of the curve is large, say greater than
       "10^{12}", this function will take an unreasonable amount of time since
       it uses an "O(N^{1/2})" algorithm.

       The library syntax is lseriesell"(E,s,A,"prec")" where prec is a "long"
       and an omitted "A" is coded as "NULL".

       ellorder"(E,z)"

       gives the order of the point "z" on the elliptic curve "E" if it is a
       torsion point, zero otherwise. In the present version 2.2.0, this is
       implemented only for elliptic curves defined over Q.

       The library syntax is orderell"(E,z)".

       ellordinate"(E,x)"

       gives a 0, 1 or 2-component vector containing the "y"-coordinates of
       the points of the curve "E" having "x" as "x"-coordinate.

       The library syntax is ordell"(E,x)".

       ellpointtoz"(E,z)"

       if "E" is an elliptic curve with coefficients in R, this computes a
       complex number "t" (modulo the lattice defining "E") corresponding to
       the point "z", i.e. such that, in the standard Weierstrass model,  wp
       "(t) = z[1]," wp "'(t) = z[2]". In other words, this is the inverse
       function of "ellztopoint".

       If "E" has coefficients in Q"_p", then either Tate's "u" is in Q"_p",
       in which case the output is a "p"-adic number "t" corresponding to the
       point "z" under the Tate parametrization, or only its square is, in
       which case the output is "t+1/t". "E" must be a long vector output by
       "ellinit".

       The library syntax is zell"(E,z,"prec")".

       ellpow"(E,z,n)"

       computes "n" times the point "z" for the group law on the elliptic
       curve "E". Here, "n" can be in Z, or "n" can be a complex quadratic
       integer if the curve "E" has complex multiplication by "n" (if not, an
       error message is issued).

       The library syntax is powell"(E,z,n)".

       ellrootno"(E,{p = 1})"

       "E" being a medium or long vector given by "ellinit", this computes the
       local (if "p ! = 1") or global (if "p = 1") root number of the L-series
       of the elliptic curve "E". Note that the global root number is the sign
       of the functional equation and conjecturally is the parity of the rank
       of the Mordell-Weil group.  The equation for "E" must have coefficients
       in Q but need not be minimal.

       The library syntax is ellrootno"(E,p)" and the result (equal to "+-1")
       is a "long".

       ellsigma"(E,z,{"flag" = 0})"

       value of the Weierstrass sigma function of the lattice associated to
       "E" as given by "ellinit" (alternatively, "E" can be given as a lattice
       "["omega"_1,"omega"_2]").

       If flag" = 1", computes an (arbitrary) determination of	log
       "("sigma"(z))".

       If flag" = 2,3", same using the product expansion instead of theta
       series.	The library syntax is ellsigma"(E,z,"flag")"

       ellsub"(E,z1,z2)"

       difference of the points "z1" and "z2" on the elliptic curve corre-
       sponding to the vector "E".

       The library syntax is subell"(E,z1,z2)".

       elltaniyama"(E)"

       computes the modular parametrization of the elliptic curve "E", where
       "E" is given in the (long or medium) format output by "ellinit", in the
       form of a two-component vector "[u,v]" of power series, given to the
       current default series precision. This vector is characterized by the
       following two properties. First the point "(x,y) = (u,v)" satisfies the
       equation of the elliptic curve. Second, the differential
       "du/(2v+a_1u+a_3)" is equal to "f(z)dz", a differential form on
       "H/"Gamma_0(N) where "N" is the conductor of the curve. The variable
       used in the power series for "u" and "v" is "x", which is implicitly
       understood to be equal to  exp "(2i"Pi" z)". It is assumed that the
       curve is a strong Weil curve, and the Manin constant is equal to 1. The
       equation of the curve "E" must be minimal (use "ellglobalred" to get a
       minimal equation).

       The library syntax is taniyama"(E)", and the precision of the result is
       determined by the global variable "precdl".

       elltors"(E,{"flag" = 0})"

       if "E" is an elliptic curve defined over Q, outputs the torsion sub-
       group of "E" as a 3-component vector "[t,v1,v2]", where "t" is the
       order of the torsion group, "v1" gives the structure of the torsion
       group as a product of cyclic groups (sorted by decreasing order), and
       "v2" gives generators for these cyclic groups. "E" must be a long vec-
       tor as output by "ellinit".

	 ?  E = ellinit([0,0,0,-1,0]);
	 ?  elltors(E)
	 %1 = [4, [2, 2], [[0, 0], [1, 0]]]

       Here, the torsion subgroup is isomorphic to Z"/2"Z"  x "Z"/2"Z, with
       generators "[0,0]" and "[1,0]".

       If flag" = 0", use Doud's algorithm : bound torsion by computing
       "#E("F"_p)" for small primes of good reduction, then look for torsion
       points using Weierstrass parametrization (and Mazur's classification).

       If flag" = 1", use Lutz--Nagell (much slower), "E" is allowed to be a
       medium vector.

       The library syntax is elltors0"(E,flag)".

       ellwp"(E,{z = x},{"flag" = 0})"

       Computes the value at "z" of the Weierstrass  wp	 function attached to
       the elliptic curve "E" as given by "ellinit" (alternatively, "E" can be
       given as a lattice "["omega"_1,"omega"_2]").

       If "z" is omitted or is a simple variable, computes the power series
       expansion in "z" (starting "z^{-2}+O(z^2)"). The number of terms to an
       even power in the expansion is the default serieslength in GP, and the
       second argument (C long integer) in library mode.

       Optional flag is (for now) only taken into account when "z" is numeric,
       and means 0: compute only  wp "(z)", 1: compute "[" wp "(z)," wp
       "'(z)]".

       The library syntax is ellwp0"(E,z,"flag","prec","precdl")". Also avail-
       able is weipell"(E,"precdl")" for the power series (in "x = polx[0]").

       ellzeta"(E,z)"

       value of the Weierstrass zeta function of the lattice associated to "E"
       as given by "ellinit" (alternatively, "E" can be given as a lattice
       "["omega"_1,"omega"_2]").

       The library syntax is ellzeta"(E,z)".

       ellztopoint"(E,z)"

       "E" being a long vector, computes the coordinates "[x,y]" on the curve
       "E" corresponding to the complex number "z".  Hence this is the inverse
       function of "ellpointtoz". In other words, if the curve is put in
       Weierstrass form, "[x,y]" represents the
	wp Weierstrass	wp -function and its derivative.  If "z" is in the
       lattice defining "E" over C, the result is the point at infinity "[0]".

       The library syntax is pointell"(E,z,"prec")".

Functions related to general number fields
       In this section can be found functions which are used almost exclu-
       sively for working in general number fields. Other less specific func-
       tions can be found in the next section on polynomials. Functions
       related to quadratic number fields can be found in the section "Label
       se:arithmetic" (Arithmetic functions).

       We shall use the following conventions:

       * nf denotes a number field, i.e. a 9-component vector in the format
       output by "nfinit". This contains the basic arithmetic data associated
       to the number field: signature, maximal order, discriminant, etc.

       * bnf denotes a big number field, i.e. a 10-component vector in the
       format output by "bnfinit". This contains nf and the deeper invariants
       of the field: units, class groups, as well as a lot of technical data
       necessary for some complex fonctions like "bnfisprincipal".

       * bnr denotes a big ``ray number field'', i.e. some data structure out-
       put by "bnrinit", even more complicated than bnf, corresponding to the
       ray class group structure of the field, for some modulus.

       * rnf denotes a relative number field (see below).

       * ideal can mean any of the following:

	 -- a Z-basis, in Hermite normal form (HNF) or not. In this case "x"
       is a square matrix.

	 -- an idele, i.e. a 2-component vector, the first being an ideal
       given as a Z--basis, the second being a "r_1+r_2"-component row vector
       giving the complex logarithmic Archimedean information.

	 -- a Z"_K"-generating system for an ideal.

	 -- a column vector "x" expressing an element of the number field on
       the integral basis, in which case the ideal is treated as being the
       principal idele (or ideal) generated by "x".

	 -- a prime ideal, i.e. a 5-component vector in the format output by
       "idealprimedec".

	 -- a polmod "x", i.e. an algebraic integer, in which case the ideal
       is treated as being the principal idele generated by "x".

	 -- an integer or a rational number, also treated as a principal
       idele.

       * a {character} on the Abelian group "\bigoplus ("Z"/N_i"Z") g_i" is
       given by a row vector chi" = [a_1,...,a_n]" such that chi"("prod"
       g_i^{n_i}) = exp(2i"Pisum" a_i n_i / N_i)".

       Warnings:

       1) An element in nf can be expressed either as a polmod or as a vector
       of components on the integral basis nf".zk". It is absolutely essential
       that all such vectors be column vectors.

       2) When giving an ideal by a Z"_K" generating system to a function
       expecting an ideal, it must be ensured that the function understands
       that it is a Z"_K"-generating system and not a Z-generating system.
       When the number of generators is strictly less than the degree of the
       field, there is no ambiguity and the program assumes that one is giving
       a Z"_K"-generating set.	When the number of generators is greater than
       or equal to the degree of the field, however, the program assumes on
       the contrary that you are giving a Z-generating set. If this is not the
       case, you must absolutely change it into a Z-generating set, the sim-
       plest manner being to use "idealhnf("nf",x)".

       Concerning relative extensions, some additional definitions are neces-
       sary.

       * A {relative matrix} will be a matrix whose entries are elements of a
       (given) number field nf, always expressed as column vectors on the
       integral basis nf".zk". Hence it is a matrix of vectors.

       * An ideal list will be a row vector of (fractional) ideals of the num-
       ber field nf.

       * A pseudo-matrix will be a pair "(A,I)" where "A" is a relative matrix
       and "I" an ideal list whose length is the same as the number of columns
       of "A". This pair will be represented by a 2-component row vector.

       * The module generated by a pseudo-matrix "(A,I)" is the sum
       sum"_i{"a"}_jA_j" where the "{"a"}_j" are the ideals of "I" and "A_j"
       is the "j"-th column of "A".

       * A pseudo-matrix "(A,I)" is a pseudo-basis of the module it generates
       if "A" is a square matrix with non-zero determinant and all the ideals
       of "I" are non-zero. We say that it is in Hermite Normal Form (HNF) if
       it is upper triangular and all the elements of the diagonal are equal
       to 1.

       * The determinant of a pseudo-basis "(A,I)" is the ideal equal to the
       product of the determinant of "A" by all the ideals of "I". The deter-
       minant of a pseudo-matrix is the determinant of any pseudo-basis of the
       module it generates.

       Finally, when defining a relative extension, the base field should be
       defined by a variable having a lower priority (i.e. a higher number)
       than the variable defining the extension. For example, under GP you can
       use the variable name "y" (or "t") to define the base field, and the
       variable name "x" to define the relative extension.

       Now a last set of definitions concerning the way big ray number fields
       (or bnr) are input, using class field theory.  These are defined by a
       triple "a1", "a2", "a3", where the defining set "[a1,a2,a3]" can have
       any of the following forms: "["bnr"]", "["bnr","subgroup"]",
       "["bnf","module"]", "["bnf","module","subgroup"]", where:

       * bnf is as output by "bnfclassunit" or "bnfinit", where units are
       mandatory unless the ideal is trivial; bnr by "bnrclass" (with flag" >
       0") or "bnrinit". This is the ground field.

       * module is either an ideal in any form (see above) or a two-component
       row vector containing an ideal and an "r_1"-component row vector of
       flags indicating which real Archimedean embeddings to take in the mod-
       ule.

       * subgroup is the HNF matrix of a subgroup of the ray class group of
       the ground field for the modulus module. This is input as a square
       matrix expressing generators of a subgroup of the ray class group
       bnr".clgp" on the given generators.

       The corresponding bnr is then the subfield of the ray class field of
       the ground field for the given modulus, associated to the given sub-
       group.

       All the functions which are specific to relative extensions, number
       fields, big number fields, big number rays, share the prefix "rnf",
       "nf", "bnf", "bnr" respectively. They are meant to take as first argu-
       ment a number field of that precise type, respectively output by
       "rnfinit", "nfinit", "bnfinit", and "bnrinit".

       However, and even though it may not be specified in the descriptions of
       the functions below, it is permissible, if the function expects a nf,
       to use a bnf instead (which contains much more information). The pro-
       gram will make the effort of converting to what it needs. On the other
       hand, if the program requires a big number field, the program will not
       launch "bnfinit" for you, which can be a costly operation. Instead, it
       will give you a specific error message.

       The data types corresponding to the structures described above are
       rather complicated. Thus, as we already have seen it with elliptic
       curves, GP provides you with some ``member functions'' to retrieve the
       data you need from these structures (once they have been initialized of
       course). The relevant types of number fields are indicated between
       parentheses:

	"bnf"	  (bnr,	 bnf ) :   big number field.

	"clgp"	 (bnr,	bnf ) :	  classgroup. This one admits the following
       three subclasses:

		"cyc"  :     cyclic decomposition (SNF).

		"gen"  : generators.

		"no"   :     number of elements.

	"diff"	 (bnr,	bnf,  nf ) :   the different ideal.

	"codiff" (bnr,	bnf,  nf ) :   the codifferent (inverse of the differ-
       ent in the ideal group).

	"disc"	(bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   discriminant.

	"fu"	(bnr,  bnf,  nf ) : fundamental units.

	"futu"	(bnr,  bnf ) :	 "[u,w]", "u" is a vector of fundamental
       units, "w" generates the torsion.

	"nf"	(bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   number field.

	"reg"	(bnr,  bnf, ) :	  regulator.

	"roots" (bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   roots of the polnomial generating the
       field.

	"sign"	(bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   "[r_1,r_2]" the signature of the field.
       This means that the field has "r_1" real	     embeddings, "2r_2" com-
       plex ones.

	"t2"	(bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   the T2 matrix (see "nfinit").

	"tu"	(bnr,  bnf, ) :	  a generator for the torsion units.

	"tufu"	(bnr,  bnf, ) :	  as "futu", but outputs "[w,u]".

	"zk"	(bnr,  bnf,  nf ) :   integral basis, i.e. a Z-basis of the
       maximal order.

	"zkst"	(bnr	       ) :   structure of "("Z"_K/m)^*" (can be
       extracted also from an idealstar).

       For instance, assume that bnf" = bnfinit("pol")", for some polynomial.
       Then bnf".clgp" retrieves the class group, and bnf".clgp.no" the class
       number. If we had set bnf" = nfinit("pol")", both would have output an
       error message. All these functions are completely recursive, thus for
       instance bnr".bnf.nf.zk" will yield the maximal order of bnr (which you
       could get directly with a simple bnr".zk" of course).

       The following functions, starting with "buch" in library mode, and with
       "bnf" under GP, are implementations of the sub-exponential algorithms
       for finding class and unit groups under GRH, due to Hafner-McCurley,
       Buchmann and Cohen-Diaz-Olivier.

       The general call to the functions concerning class groups of general
       number fields (i.e. excluding "quadclassunit") involves a polynomial
       "P" and a technical vector

	tech" = [c,c2,"nrel","borne","nrpid","minsfb"],"

       where the parameters are to be understood as follows:

       "P" is the defining polynomial for the number field, which must be in
       Z"[X]", irreducible and, preferably, monic. In fact, if you supply a
       non-monic polynomial at this point, GP will issue a warning, then
       transform your polynomial so that it becomes monic. Instead of the nor-
       mal result, say "res", you then get a vector "[res,Mod(a,Q)]", where
       "Mod(a,Q) = Mod(X,P)" gives the change of variables.

       The numbers "c" and "c2" are positive real numbers which control the
       execution time and the stack size. To get maximum speed, set "c2 = c".
       To get a rigorous result (under GRH) you must take "c2 = 12" (or "c2 =
       6" in the quadratic case, but then you should use the much faster func-
       tion "quadclassunit"). Reasonable values for "c" are between 0.1 and 2.
       (The defaults are "c = c2 = 0.3").

       nrel is the number of initial extra relations requested in computing
       the relation matrix. Reasonable values are between 5 and 20. (The
       default is 5).

       borne is a multiplicative coefficient of the Minkowski bound which con-
       trols the search for small norm relations. If this parameter is set
       equal to 0, the program does not search for small norm relations. Oth-
       erwise reasonable values are between 0.5 and 2.0. (The default is 1.0).

       nrpid is the maximal number of small norm relations associated to each
       ideal in the factor base. Irrelevant when borne" = 0". Otherwise, rea-
       sonable values are between 4 and 20. (The default is 4).

       minsfb is the minimal number of elements in the ``sub-factorbase''.  If
       the program does not seem to succeed in finding a full rank matrix
       (which you can see in GP by typing "\g 2"), increase this number. Rea-
       sonable values are between 2 and 5. (The default is 3).

       Remarks.

       Apart from the polynomial "P", you don't need to supply any of the
       technical parameters (under the library you still need to send at least
       an empty vector, "cgetg(1,t_VEC)"). However, should you choose to set
       some of them, they must be given in the requested order. For example,
       if you want to specify a given value of "nrel", you must give some val-
       ues as well for "c" and "c2", and provide a vector "[c,c2,nrel]".

       Note also that you can use an nf instead of "P", which avoids recomput-
       ing the integral basis and analogous quantities.

       bnfcertify"("bnf")"

       bnf being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" or "bnfclassunit",
       checks whether the result is correct, i.e. whether it is possible to
       remove the assumption of the Generalized Riemann Hypothesis. If it is
       correct, the answer is 1.  If not, the program may output some error
       message, but more probably will loop indefinitely. In no occasion can
       the program give a wrong answer (barring bugs of course): if the pro-
       gram answers 1, the answer is certified.

       The library syntax is certifybuchall"("bnf")", and the result is a C
       long.

       bnfclassunit"(P,{"flag" = 0},{"tech" = []})"

       Buchmann's sub-exponential algorithm for computing the class group, the
       regulator and a system of fundamental units of the general algebraic
       number field "K" defined by the irreducible polynomial "P" with integer
       coefficients.

       The result of this function is a vector "v" with 10 components (it is
       not a bnf, you need "bnfinit" for that), which for ease of presentation
       is in fact output as a one column matrix. First we describe the default
       behaviour (flag" = 0"):

       "v[1]" is equal to the polynomial "P". Note that for optimum perfor-
       mance, "P" should have gone through "polred" or "nfinit(x,2)".

       "v[2]" is the 2-component vector "[r1,r2]", where "r1" and "r2" are as
       usual the number of real and half the number of complex embeddings of
       the number field "K".

       "v[3]" is the 2-component vector containing the field discriminant and
       the index.

       "v[4]" is an integral basis in Hermite normal form.

       "v[5]" ("v.clgp") is a 3-component vector containing the class number
       ("v.clgp.no"), the structure of the class group as a product of cyclic
       groups of order "n_i" ("v.clgp.cyc"), and the corresponding generators
       of the class group of respective orders "n_i" ("v.clgp.gen").

       "v[6]" ("v.reg") is the regulator computed to an accuracy which is the
       maximum of an internally determined accuracy and of the default.

       "v[7]" is a measure of the correctness of the result. If it is close to
       1, the results are correct (under GRH). If it is close to a larger
       integer, this shows that the product of the class number by the regula-
       tor is off by a factor equal to this integer, and you must start again
       with a larger value for "c" or a different random seed, i.e. use the
       function "setrand".  (Since the computation involves a random process,
       starting again with exactly the same parameters may give the correct
       result.) In this case a warning message is printed.

       "v[8]" ("v.tu") a vector with 2 components, the first being the number
       "w" of roots of unity in "K" and the second a primitive "w"-th root of
       unity expressed as a polynomial.

       "v[9]" ("v.fu") is a system of fundamental units also expressed as
       polynomials.

       "v[10]" gives a measure of the correctness of the computations of the
       fundamental units (not of the regulator), expressed as a number of
       bits. If this number is greater than 20, say, everything is OK. If
       "v[10] <= 0", then we have lost all accuracy in computing the units
       (usually an error message will be printed and the units not given). In
       the intermediate cases, one must proceed with caution (for example by
       increasing the current precision).

       If flag" = 1", and the precision happens to be insufficient for obtain-
       ing the fundamental units exactly, the internal precision is doubled
       and the computation redone, until the exact results are obtained. The
       user should be warned that this can take a very long time when the
       coefficients of the fundamental units on the integral basis are very
       large, for example in the case of large real quadratic fields. In that
       case, there are alternate methods for representing algebraic numbers
       which are not implemented in PARI.

       If flag" = 2", the fundamental units and roots of unity are not com-
       puted.  Hence the result has only 7 components, the first seven ones.

       tech is a technical vector (empty by default) containing "c", "c2",
       nrel, borne, nbpid, minsfb, in this order (see the beginning of the
       section or the keyword "bnf").  You can supply any number of these pro-
       vided you give an actual value to each of them (the ``empty arg'' trick
       won't work here). Careful use of these parameters may speed up your
       computations considerably.

       The library syntax is bnfclassunit0"(P,"flag","tech","prec")".

       bnfclgp"(P,{"tech" = []})"

       as "bnfclassunit", but only outputs "v[5]", i.e. the class group.

       The library syntax is bnfclassgrouponly"(P,"tech","prec")", where tech
       is as described under "bnfclassunit".

       bnfdecodemodule"("nf",m)"

       if "m" is a module as output in the first component of an extension
       given by "bnrdisclist", outputs the true module.

       The library syntax is decodemodule"("nf",m)".

       bnfinit"(P,{"flag" = 0},{"tech" = []})"

       essentially identical to "bnfclassunit" except that the output contains
       a lot of technical data, and should not be printed out explicitly in
       general. The result of "bnfinit" is used in programs such as "bnfis-
       principal", "bnfisunit" or "bnfnarrow". The result is a 10-component
       vector bnf.

       * The first 6 and last 2 components are technical and in principle are
       not used by the casual user. However, for the sake of completeness,
       their description is as follows. We use the notations explained in the
       book by H. Cohen, A Course in Computational Algebraic Number Theory,
       Graduate Texts in Maths 138, Springer-Verlag, 1993, Section 6.5, and
       subsection 6.5.5 in particular.

       bnf"[1]" contains the matrix "W", i.e. the matrix in Hermite normal
       form giving relations for the class group on prime ideal generators
       "("p"_i)_{1 <= i <= r}".

       bnf"[2]" contains the matrix "B", i.e. the matrix containing the
       expressions of the prime ideal factorbase in terms of the p"_i". It is
       an "r x c" matrix.

       bnf"[3]" contains the complex logarithmic embeddings of the system of
       fundamental units which has been found. It is an "(r_1+r_2) x
       (r_1+r_2-1)" matrix.

       bnf"[4]" contains the matrix "M''_C" of Archimedean components of the
       relations of the matrix "(W|B)".

       bnf"[5]" contains the prime factor base, i.e. the list of prime ideals
       used in finding the relations.

       bnf"[6]" contains the permutation of the prime factor base which was
       necessary to reduce the relation matrix to the form explained in sub-
       section 6.5.5 of GTM 138 (i.e. with a big "c x c" identity matrix on
       the lower right). Note that in the above mentioned book, the need to
       permute the rows of the relation matrices which occur was not empha-
       sized.

       bnf"[9]" is a 3-element row vector used in "bnfisprincipal" only and
       obtained as follows.  Let "D = U W V" obtained by applying the Smith
       normal form algorithm to the matrix "W" ( = bnf"[1]") and let "U_r" be
       the reduction of "U" modulo "D". The first elements of the factorbase
       are given (in terms of "bnf.gen") by the columns of "U_r", with archi-
       median component "g_a"; let also "GD_a" be the archimedian components
       of the generators of the (principal) ideals defined by the
       "bnf.gen[i]^bnf.cyc[i]". Then bnf"[9] = [U_r, g_a, GD_a]".

       Finally, bnf"[10]" is by default unused and set equal to 0. This field
       is used to store further information about the field as it becomes
       available (which is rarely needed, hence would be too expensive to com-
       pute during the initial "bnfinit" call). For instance, the generators
       of the principal ideals "bnf.gen[i]^bnf.cyc[i]" (during a call to
       "bnrisprincipal"), or those corresponding to the relations in "W" and
       "B" (when the "bnf" internal precision needs to be increased).

       * The less technical components are as follows:

       bnf"[7]" or bnf".nf" is equal to the number field data nf as would be
       given by "nfinit".

       bnf"[8]" is a vector containing the last 6 components of "bnfclas-
       sunit[,1]", i.e. the classgroup bnf".clgp", the regulator bnf".reg",
       the general ``check'' number which should be close to 1, the number of
       roots of unity and a generator bnf".tu", the fundamental units
       bnf".fu", and finally the check on their computation. If the precision
       becomes insufficient, GP outputs a warning ("fundamental units too
       large, not given") and does not strive to compute the units by default
       (flag" = 0").

       When flag" = 1", GP insists on finding the fundamental units exactly,
       the internal precision being doubled and the computation redone, until
       the exact results are obtained. The user should be warned that this can
       take a very long time when the coefficients of the fundamental units on
       the integral basis are very large.

       When flag" = 2", on the contrary, it is initially agreed that GP will
       not compute units.

       When flag" = 3", computes a very small version of "bnfinit", a ``small
       big number field'' (or sbnf for short) which contains enough informa-
       tion to recover the full bnf vector very rapidly, but which is much
       smaller and hence easy to store and print. It is supposed to be used in
       conjunction with "bnfmake". The output is a 12 component vector "v", as
       follows. Let bnf be the result of a full "bnfinit", complete with
       units. Then "v[1]" is the polynomial "P", "v[2]" is the number of real
       embeddings "r_1", "v[3]" is the field discriminant, "v[4]" is the inte-
       gral basis, "v[5]" is the list of roots as in the sixth component of
       "nfinit", "v[6]" is the matrix "MD" of "nfinit" giving a Z-basis of the
       different, "v[7]" is the matrix "W = "bnf"[1]", "v[8]" is the matrix
       "matalpha = "bnf"[2]", "v[9]" is the prime ideal factor base bnf"[5]"
       coded in a compact way, and ordered according to the permutation
       bnf"[6]", "v[10]" is the 2-component vector giving the number of roots
       of unity and a generator, expressed on the integral basis, "v[11]" is
       the list of fundamental units, expressed on the integral basis, "v[12]"
       is a vector containing the algebraic numbers alpha corresponding to the
       columns of the matrix "matalpha", expressed on the integral basis.

       Note that all the components are exact (integral or rational), except
       for the roots in "v[5]". In practice, this is the only component which
       a user is allowed to modify, by recomputing the roots to a higher accu-
       racy if desired. Note also that the member functions will not work on
       sbnf, you have to use "bnfmake" explicitly first.

       The library syntax is bnfinit0"(P,"flag","tech","prec")".

       bnfisintnorm"("bnf",x)"

       computes a complete system of solutions (modulo units of positive norm)
       of the absolute norm equation "Norm(a) = x", where "a" is an integer in
       bnf. If bnf has not been certified, the correctness of the result
       depends on the validity of GRH.

       The library syntax is bnfisintnorm"("bnf",x)".

       bnfisnorm"("bnf",x,{"flag" = 1})"

       tries to tell whether the rational number "x" is the norm of some ele-
       ment y in bnf. Returns a vector "[a,b]" where "x = Norm(a)*b". Looks
       for a solution which is an "S"-unit, with "S" a certain set of prime
       ideals containing (among others) all primes dividing "x". If bnf is
       known to be Galois, set flag" = 0" (in this case, "x" is a norm iff "b
       = 1"). If flag is non zero the program adds to "S" the following prime
       ideals, depending on the sign of flag. If flag" > 0", the ideals of
       norm less than flag. And if flag" < 0" the ideals dividing flag.

       If you are willing to assume GRH, the answer is guaranteed (i.e. "x" is
       a norm iff "b = 1"), if "S" contains all primes less than 12 log
       "("disc"("Bnf"))^2", where Bnf is the Galois closure of bnf.

       The library syntax is bnfisnorm"("bnf",x,"flag","prec")", where flag
       and prec are "long"s.

       bnfissunit"("bnf","sfu",x)"

       bnf being output by "bnfinit", sfu by "bnfsunit", gives the column vec-
       tor of exponents of "x" on the fundamental "S"-units and the roots of
       unity.  If "x" is not a unit, outputs an empty vector.

       The library syntax is bnfissunit"("bnf","sfu",x)".

       bnfisprincipal"("bnf",x,{"flag" = 1})"

       bnf being the number field data output by "bnfinit", and "x" being
       either a Z-basis of an ideal in the number field (not necessarily in
       HNF) or a prime ideal in the format output by the function "ideal-
       primedec", this function tests whether the ideal is principal or not.
       The result is more complete than a simple true/false answer: it gives a
       row vector "[v_1,v_2,check]", where

       "v_1" is the vector of components "c_i" of the class of the ideal "x"
       in the class group, expressed on the generators "g_i" given by
       "bnfinit" (specifically bnf".clgp.gen" which is the same as
       bnf"[8][1][3]"). The "c_i" are chosen so that "0 <= c_i < n_i" where
       "n_i" is the order of "g_i" (the vector of "n_i" being bnf".clgp.cyc",
       that is bnf"[8][1][2]").

       "v_2" gives on the integral basis the components of alpha such that "x
       = "alphaprod"_ig_i^{c_i}". In particular, "x" is principal if and only
       if "v_1" is equal to the zero vector, and if this the case "x = "alp-
       haZ"_K" where alpha is given by "v_2". Note that if alpha is too large
       to be given, a warning message will be printed and "v_2" will be set
       equal to the empty vector.

       Finally the third component check is analogous to the last component of
       "bnfclassunit": it gives a check on the accuracy of the result, in
       bits.  check should be at least 10, and preferably much more. In any
       case, the result is checked for correctness.

       If flag" = 0", outputs only "v_1", which is much easier to compute.

       If flag" = 2", does as if flag were 0, but doubles the precision until
       a result is obtained.

       If flag" = 3", as in the default behaviour (flag" = 1"), but doubles
       the precision until a result is obtained.

       The user is warned that these two last setting may induce very lengthy
       computations.

       The library syntax is isprincipalall"("bnf",x,"flag")".

       bnfisunit"("bnf",x)"

       bnf being the number field data output by "bnfinit" and "x" being an
       algebraic number (type integer, rational or polmod), this outputs the
       decomposition of "x" on the fundamental units and the roots of unity if
       "x" is a unit, the empty vector otherwise. More precisely, if
       "u_1",...,"u_r" are the fundamental units, and zeta is the generator of
       the group of roots of unity (found by "bnfclassunit" or "bnfinit"), the
       output is a vector "[x_1,...,x_r,x_{r+1}]" such that "x =
       u_1^{x_1}...u_r^{x_r}."zeta"^{x_{r+1}}". The "x_i" are integers for "i
       <= r" and is an integer modulo the order of zeta for "i = r+1".

       The library syntax is isunit"("bnf",x)".

       bnfmake"("sbnf")"

       sbnf being a ``small bnf'' as output by "bnfinit""(x,3)", computes the
       complete "bnfinit" information. The result is not identical to what
       "bnfinit" would yield, but is functionally identical. The execution
       time is very small compared to a complete "bnfinit". Note that if the
       default precision in GP (or prec in library mode) is greater than the
       precision of the roots sbnf"[5]", these are recomputed so as to get a
       result with greater accuracy.

       Note that the member functions are not available for sbnf, you have to
       use "bnfmake" explicitly first.

       The library syntax is makebigbnf"("sbnf","prec")", where prec is a C
       long integer.

       bnfnarrow"("bnf")"

       bnf being a big number field as output by "bnfinit", computes the nar-
       row class group of bnf. The output is a 3-component row vector "v"
       analogous to the corresponding class group component bnf".clgp"
       (bnf"[8][1]"): the first component is the narrow class number "v.no",
       the second component is a vector containing the SNF cyclic components
       "v.cyc" of the narrow class group, and the third is a vector giving the
       generators of the corresponding "v.gen" cyclic groups. Note that this
       function is a special case of "bnrclass".

       The library syntax is buchnarrow"("bnf")".

       bnfsignunit"("bnf")"

       bnf being a big number field output by "bnfinit", this computes an "r_1
       x (r_1+r_2-1)" matrix having "+-1" components, giving the signs of the
       real embeddings of the fundamental units.

       The library syntax is signunits"("bnf")".

       bnfreg"("bnf")"

       bnf being a big number field output by "bnfinit", computes its regula-
       tor.

       The library syntax is regulator"("bnf","tech","prec")", where tech is
       as in "bnfclassunit".

       bnfsunit"("bnf",S)"

       computes the fundamental "S"-units of the number field bnf (output by
       "bnfinit"), where "S" is a list of prime ideals (output by "ideal-
       primedec"). The output is a vector "v" with 6 components.

       "v[1]" gives a minimal system of (integral) generators of the "S"-unit
       group modulo the unit group.

       "v[2]" contains technical data needed by "bnfissunit".

       "v[3]" is an empty vector (used to give the logarithmic embeddings of
       the generators in "v[1]" in version 2.0.16).

       "v[4]" is the "S"-regulator (this is the product of the regulator, the
       determinant of "v[2]" and the natural logarithms of the norms of the
       ideals in "S").

       "v[5]" gives the "S"-class group structure, in the usual format (a row
       vector whose three components give in order the "S"-class number, the
       cyclic components and the generators).

       "v[6]" is a copy of "S".

       The library syntax is bnfsunit"("bnf",S,"prec")".

       bnfunit"("bnf")"

       bnf being a big number field as output by "bnfinit", outputs a two-com-
       ponent row vector giving in the first component the vector of fundamen-
       tal units of the number field, and in the second component the number
       of bit of accuracy which remained in the computation (which is always
       correct, otherwise an error message is printed).	 This function is
       mainly for people who used the wrong flag in "bnfinit" and would like
       to skip part of a lengthy "bnfinit" computation.

       The library syntax is buchfu"("bnf")".

       bnrL1"("bnr","subgroup",{"flag" = 0})"

       bnr being the number field data which is output by "bnrinit(,,1)" and
       subgroup being a square matrix defining a congruence subgroup of the
       ray class group corresponding to bnr (or 0 for the trivial congruence
       subgroup), returns for each character chi of the ray class group which
       is trivial on this subgroup, the value at "s = 1" (or "s = 0") of the
       abelian "L"-function associated to chi. For the value at "s = 0", the
       function returns in fact for each character chi a vector "[r_"chi" ,
       c_"chi"]" where "r_"chi is the order of "L(s, "chi")" at "s = 0" and
       "c_"chi the first non-zero term in the expansion of "L(s, "chi")" at "s
       = 0"; in other words

	"L(s, "chi") = c_"chi".s^{r_"chi"} + O(s^{r_"chi" + 1})"

       near 0. flag is optional, default value is 0; its binary digits mean 1:
       compute at "s = 1" if set to 1 or "s = 0" if set to 0, 2: compute the
       primitive "L"-functions associated to chi if set to 0 or the "L"-func-
       tion with Euler factors at prime ideals dividing the modulus of bnr
       removed if set to 1 (this is the so-called "L_S(s, "chi")" function
       where "S" is the set of infinite places of the number field together
       with the finite prime ideals dividing the modulus of bnr, see the exam-
       ple below), 3: returns also the character.

       Example:

	 bnf = bnfinit(x^2 - 229);
	 bnr = bnrinit(bnf,1,1);
	 bnrL1(bnr, 0)

       returns the order and the first non-zero term of the abelian "L"-func-
       tions "L(s, "chi")" at "s = 0" where chi runs through the characters of
       the class group of Q"(" sqrt "{229})". Then

	 bnr2 = bnrinit(bnf,2,1);
	 bnrL1(bnr2,0,2)

       returns the order and the first non-zero terms of the abelian "L"-func-
       tions "L_S(s, "chi")" at "s = 0" where chi runs through the characters
       of the class group of Q"(" sqrt "{229})" and "S" is the set of infinite
       places of Q"(" sqrt "{229})" together with the finite prime 2 (note
       that the ray class group modulo 2 is in fact the class group, so
       "bnrL1(bnr2,0)" returns exactly the same answer as "bnrL1(bnr,0)"!).

       The library syntax is bnrL1"("bnr","subgroup","flag","prec")"

       bnrclass"("bnf","ideal",{"flag" = 0})"

       bnf being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" (the units are
       mandatory unless the ideal is trivial), and ideal being either an ideal
       in any form or a two-component row vector containing an ideal and an
       "r_1"-component row vector of flags indicating which real Archimedean
       embeddings to take in the module, computes the ray class group of the
       number field for the module ideal, as a 3-component vector as all other
       finite Abelian groups (cardinality, vector of cyclic components, corre-
       sponding generators).

       If flag" = 2", the output is different. It is a 6-component vector "w".
       "w[1]" is bnf. "w[2]" is the result of applying "idealstar("bnf",I,2)".
       "w[3]", "w[4]" and "w[6]" are technical components used only by the
       function "bnrisprincipal". "w[5]" is the structure of the ray class
       group as would have been output with flag" = 0".

       If flag" = 1", as above, except that the generators of the ray class
       group are not computed, which saves time.

       The library syntax is bnrclass0"("bnf","ideal","flag","prec")".

       bnrclassno"("bnf",I)"

       bnf being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" (units are manda-
       tory unless the ideal is trivial), and "I" being either an ideal in any
       form or a two-component row vector containing an ideal and an
       "r_1"-component row vector of flags indicating which real Archimedean
       embeddings to take in the modulus, computes the ray class number of the
       number field for the modulus "I". This is faster than "bnrclass" and
       should be used if only the ray class number is desired.

       The library syntax is rayclassno"("bnf",I)".

       bnrclassnolist"("bnf","list")"

       bnf being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" (units are manda-
       tory unless the ideal is trivial), and list being a list of modules as
       output by "ideallist" of "ideallistarch", outputs the list of the class
       numbers of the corresponding ray class groups.

       The library syntax is rayclassnolist"("bnf","list")".

       bnrconductor"(a_1,{a_2},{a_3}, {"flag" = 0})"

       conductor of the subfield of a ray class field as defined by
       "[a_1,a_2,a_3]" (see "bnr" at the beginning of this section).

       The library syntax is bnrconductor"(a_1,a_2,a_3,"flag","prec")", where
       an omitted argument among the "a_i" is input as "gzero", and flag is a
       C long.

       bnrconductorofchar"("bnr","chi")"

       bnr being a big ray number field as output by "bnrclass", and chi being
       a row vector representing a character as expressed on the generators of
       the ray class group, gives the conductor of this character as a modu-
       lus.

       The library syntax is bnrconductorofchar"("bnr","chi","prec")" where
       prec is a "long".

       bnrdisc"(a1,{a2},{a3},{"flag" = 0})"

       "a1", "a2", "a3" defining a big ray number field "L" over a groud field
       "K" (see "bnr" at the beginning of this section for the meaning of
       "a1", "a2", "a3"), outputs a 3-component row vector "[N,R_1,D]", where
       "N" is the (absolute) degree of "L", "R_1" the number of real places of
       "L", and "D" the discriminant of "L/"Q, including sign (if flag" = 0").

       If flag" = 1", as above but outputs relative data. "N" is now the
       degree of "L/K", "R_1" is the number of real places of "K" unramified
       in "L" (so that the number of real places of "L" is equal to "R_1"
       times the relative degree "N"), and "D" is the relative discriminant
       ideal of "L/K".

       If flag" = 2", does as in case 0, except that if the modulus is not the
       exact conductor corresponding to the "L", no data is computed and the
       result is 0 ("gzero").

       If flag" = 3", as case 2, outputting relative data.

       The library syntax is bnrdisc0"(a1,a2,a3,"flag","prec")".

       bnrdisclist"("bnf","bound",{"arch"},{"flag" = 0})"

       bnf being a big number field as output by "bnfinit" (the units are
       mandatory), computes a list of discriminants of Abelian extensions of
       the number field by increasing modulus norm up to bound bound, where
       the ramified Archimedean places are given by arch (unramified at infin-
       ity if arch is void or omitted). If flag is non-zero, give arch all the
       possible values. (See "bnr" at the beginning of this section for the
       meaning of "a1", "a2", "a3".)

       The alternative syntax "bnrdisclist("bnf","list")" is supported, where
       list is as output by "ideallist" or "ideallistarch" (with units).

       The output format is as follows. The output "v" is a row vector of row
       vectors, allowing the bound to be greater than "2^{16}" for 32-bit
       machines, and "v[i][j]" is understood to be in fact "V[2^{15}(i-1)+j]"
       of a unique big vector "V" (note that "2^{15}" is hardwired and can be
       increased in the source code only on 64-bit machines and higher).

       Such a component "V[k]" is itself a vector "W" (maybe of length 0)
       whose components correspond to each possible ideal of norm "k". Each
       component "W[i]" corresponds to an Abelian extension "L" of bnf whose
       modulus is an ideal of norm "k" and no Archimedean components (hence
       the extension is unramified at infinity). The extension "W[i]" is rep-
       resented by a 4-component row vector "[m,d,r,D]" with the following
       meaning. "m" is the prime ideal factorization of the modulus, "d =
       [L:"Q"]" is the absolute degree of "L", "r" is the number of real
       places of "L", and "D" is the factorization of the absolute discrimi-
       nant. Each prime ideal "pr = [p,"alpha",e,f,"beta"]" in the prime fac-
       torization "m" is coded as "p.n^2+(f-1).n+(j-1)", where "n" is the
       degree of the base field and "j" is such that

       "pr = idealprimedec("nf",p)[j]".

       "m" can be decoded using "bnfdecodemodule".

       The library syntax is bnrdisclist0"(a1,a2,a3,"bound","arch","flag")".

       bnrinit"("bnf","ideal",{"flag" = 0})"

       bnf is as output by "bnfinit", ideal is a valid ideal (or a module),
       initializes data linked to the ray class group structure corresponding
       to this module. This is the same as "bnrclass("bnf","ideal","flag"+1)".

       The library syntax is bnrinit0"("bnf","ideal","flag","prec")".

       bnrisconductor"(a1,{a2},{a3})"

       "a1", "a2", "a3" represent an extension of the base field, given by
       class field theory for some modulus encoded in the parameters. Outputs
       1 if this modulus is the conductor, and 0 otherwise. This is slightly
       faster than "bnrconductor".

       The library syntax is bnrisconductor"(a1,a2,a3)" and the result is a
       "long".

       bnrisprincipal"("bnr",x,{"flag" = 1})"

       bnr being the number field data which is output by "bnrinit""(,,1)" and
       "x" being an ideal in any form, outputs the components of "x" on the
       ray class group generators in a way similar to "bnfisprincipal". That
       is a 3-component vector "v" where "v[1]" is the vector of components of
       "x" on the ray class group generators, "v[2]" gives on the integral
       basis an element alpha such that "x = "alphaprod"_ig_i^{x_i}". Finally
       "v[3]" indicates the number of bits of accuracy left in the result. In
       any case the result is checked for correctness, but "v[3]" is included
       to see if it is necessary to increase the accuracy in other computa-
       tions.

       If flag" = 0", outputs only "v_1". In that case, bnr need not contain
       the ray class group generators, i.e. it may be created with
       "bnrinit""(,,0)"

       The library syntax is isprincipalrayall"("bnr",x,"flag")".

       bnrrootnumber"("bnr","chi",{"flag" = 0})"

       if chi" = "chi is a (not necessarily primitive) character over bnr, let
       "L(s,"chi") = "sum"_{id} "chi"(id) N(id)^{-s}" be the associated Artin
       L-function. Returns the so-called Artin root number, i.e. the complex
       number "W("chi")" of modulus 1 such that

	Lambda"(1-s,"chi") = W("chi") "Lambda"(s,\overline{"chi"})"

       where Lambda"(s,"chi") = A("chi")^{s/2}"gamma"_"chi"(s) L(s,"chi")" is
       the enlarged L-function associated to "L".

       The generators of the ray class group are needed, and you can set flag"
       = 1" if the character is known to be primitive. Example:

	 bnf = bnfinit(x^2 - 145);
	 bnr = bnrinit(bnf,7,1);
	 bnrrootnumber(bnr, [5])

       returns the root number of the character chi of "Cl_7("Q"(" sqrt
       "{145}))" such that chi"(g) = "zeta"^5", where "g" is the generator of
       the ray-class field and zeta" = e^{2i"Pi"/N}" where "N" is the order of
       "g" ("N = 12" as "bnr.cyc" readily tells us).

       The library syntax is bnrrootnumber"("bnf","chi","flag")"

       bnrstark"{("bnr","subgroup",{"flag" = 0})}"

       bnr being as output by "bnrinit(,,1)", finds a relative equation for
       the class field corresponding to the modulus in bnr and the given con-
       gruence subgroup using Stark units (set subgroup" = 0" if you want the
       whole ray class group). The main variable of bnr must not be "x", and
       the ground field and the class field must be totally real and not iso-
       morphic to Q (over the rationnals, use "polsubcyclo" or "galoissubcy-
       clo"). flag is optional and may be set to 0 to obtain a reduced rela-
       tive polynomial, 1 to be satisfied with any relative polynomial, 2 to
       obtain an absolute polynomial and 3 to obtain the irreducible relative
       polynomial of the Stark unit, 0 being default.  Example:

	 bnf = bnfinit(y^2 - 3);
	 bnr = bnrinit(bnf, 5, 1);
	 bnrstark(bnr, 0)

       returns the ray class field of Q"(" sqrt "{3})" modulo 5.

       Remark. The result of the computation depends on the choice of a modu-
       lus verifying special conditions. By default the function will try few
       moduli, choosing the one giving the smallest result. In some cases
       where the result is however very large, you can tell the function to
       try more moduli by adding 4 to the value of flag. Whether this flag is
       set or not, the function may fail in some extreme cases, returning the
       error message

       "Cannot find a suitable modulus in FindModule".

       In this case, the corresponding congruence group is a product of cyclic
       groups and, for the time being, the class field has to be obtained by
       splitting this group into its cyclic components.

       The library syntax is bnrstark"("bnr","subgroup","flag")".

       dirzetak"("nf",b)"

       gives as a vector the first "b" coefficients of the Dedekind zeta func-
       tion of the number field nf considered as a Dirichlet series.

       The library syntax is dirzetak"("nf",b)".

       factornf"(x,t)"

       factorization of the univariate polynomial "x" over the number field
       defined by the (univariate) polynomial "t". "x" may have coefficients
       in Q or in the number field. The main variable of "t" must be of lower
       priority than that of "x" (in other words the variable number of "t"
       must be greater than that of "x"). However if the coefficients of the
       number field occur explicitly (as polmods) as coefficients of "x", the
       variable of these polmods must be the same as the main variable of "t".
       For example

	 ? factornf(x^2 + Mod(y, y^2+1), y^2+1);
	 ? factornf(x^2 + 1, y^2+1); \\ these two are OK
	 ? factornf(x^2 + Mod(z,z^2+1), y^2+1)
	   ***	 incorrect type in gmulsg

       The library syntax is polfnf"(x,t)".

       galoisfixedfield"("gal","perm",{fl = 0},{v = y}))"

       gal being be a Galois field as output by "galoisinit" and perm an ele-
       ment of gal".group" or a vector of such elements, computes the fixed
       field of gal by the automorphism defined by the permutations perm of
       the roots gal".roots". "P" is guaranteed to be squarefree modulo
       gal".p".

       If no flags or flag" = 0", output format is the same as for "nfsub-
       field", returning "[P,x]" such that "P" is a polynomial defining the
       fixed field, and "x" is a root of "P" expressed as a polmod in
       gal".pol".

       If flag" = 1" return only the polynomial "P".

       If flag" = 2" return "[P,x,F]" where "P" and "x" are as above and "F"
       is the factorization of gal".pol" over the field defined by "P", where
       variable "v" ("y" by default) stands for a root of "P". The priority of
       "v" must be less than the priority of the variable of gal".pol".

       Example:

	 G = galoisinit(x^4+1);
	 galoisfixedfield(G,G.group[2],2)
	   [x^2 + 2, Mod(x^3 + x, x^4 + 1), [x^2 - y*x - 1, x^2 + y*x - 1]]

       computes the factorization  "x^4+1 = (x^2-" sqrt "{-2}x-1)(x^2+" sqrt
       "{-2}x-1)"

       The library syntax is galoisfixedfield"("gal","perm",p)".

       galoisinit"("pol",{den})"

       computes the Galois group and all neccessary information for computing
       the fixed fields of the Galois extension "K/"Q where "K" is the number
       field defined by pol (monic irreducible polynomial in Z"[X]" or a num-
       ber field as output by "nfinit"). The extension "K/"Q must be Galois
       with Galois group ``weakly'' super-solvable (see "nfgaloisconj")

       Warning: The interface of this function is experimental, so the
       described output can be subject to important changes in the near
       future. However the function itself should work as described. For any
       remarks about this interface, please mail "allomber@math.u-bor-
       deaux.fr".

       The output is an 8-component vector gal.

       gal"[1]" contains the polynomial pol (gal".pol").

       gal"[2]" is a three--components vector "[p,e,q]" where "p" is a prime
       number (gal".p") such that pol totally split modulo "p" , "e" is an
       integer and "q = p^e" (gal".mod") is the modulus of the roots in
       gal".roots".

       gal"[3]" is a vector "L" containing the "p"-adic roots of pol as inte-
       gers implicitly modulo gal".mod".  (gal".roots").

       gal"[4]" is the inverse of the Van der Monde matrix of the "p"-adic
       roots of pol, multiplied by gal"[5]".

       gal"[5]" is a multiple of the least common denominator of the automor-
       phisms expressed as polynomial in a root of pol.

       gal"[6]" is the Galois group "G" expressed as a vector of permutations
       of "L" (gal".group").

       gal"[7]" is a generating subset "S = [s_1,...,s_g]" of "G" expressed as
       a vector of permutations of "L" (gal".gen").

       gal"[8]" contains the relative orders "[o_1,...,o_g]" of the generators
       of "S" (gal".orders").

       Let "H" be the maximal normal supersolvable subgroup of "G", we have
       the following properties:

	 * if "G/H ~  A_4" then "[o_1,...,o_g]" ends by "[2,2,3]".

	 * if "G/H ~  S_4" then "[o_1,...,o_g]" ends by "[2,2,3,2]".

	 * else "G" is super-solvable.

	 * for "1 <= i <= g" the subgroup of "G" generated by "[s_1,...,s_g]"
       is normal, with the exception of "i = g-2" in the second case and of "i
       = g-3" in the third.

	 * the relative order "o_i" of "s_i" is its order in the quotient
       group "G/<s_1,...,s_{i-1}>", with the same exceptions.

	 * for any "x belongs to G" there exists a unique family
       "[e_1,...,e_g]" such that (no exceptions):

       -- for "1 <= i <= g" we have "0 <= e_i < o_i"

       -- "x = g_1^{e_1}g_2^{e_2}...g_n^{e_n}"

       If present "den" must be a suitable value for gal"[5]".

       The library syntax is galoisinit"("gal","den")".

       galoispermtopol"("gal","perm")"

       gal being a galois field as output by "galoisinit" and perm a element
       of gal".group", return the polynomial defining the Galois automorphism,
       as output by "nfgaloisconj", associated with the permutation perm of
       the roots gal".roots". perm can also be a vector or matrix, in this
       case, "galoispermtopol" is applied to all components recursively.

       Note that

	 G = galoisinit(pol);
	 galoispermtopol(G, G[6])~

       is equivalent to "nfgaloisconj(pol)", if degree of pol is greater or
       equal to 2.

       The library syntax is galoispermtopol"("gal","perm")".

       galoissubcyclo"(n,H,{Z},{v})"

       compute a polynomial defining the subfield of Q"("zeta"_n)" fixed by
       the subgroup H of Z"/n"Z. The subgroup H can be given by a generator, a
       set of generators given by a vector or a HNF matrix. If present "Z"
       must be znstar(n), and is currently only used when H is a HNF matrix.
       If v is given, the polynomial is given in the variable v.

       The following function can be used to compute all subfields of
       Q"("zeta"_n)" (of order less than "d", if "d" is set):

	 subcyclo(n, d = -1)=
	 {
	   local(Z,G,S);
	   if (d < 0, d = n);
	   Z = znstar(n);
	   G = matdiagonal(Z[2]);
	   S = [];
	   forsubgroup(H = G, d,
	     S = concat(S, galoissubcyclo(n, mathnf(concat(G,H)),Z));
	   );
	   S
	 }

       The library syntax is galoissubcyclo"(n,H,Z,v)" where n is a C long
       integer.

       idealadd"("nf",x,y)"

       sum of the two ideals "x" and "y" in the number field nf. When "x" and
       "y" are given by Z-bases, this does not depend on nf and can be used to
       compute the sum of any two Z-modules. The result is given in HNF.

       The library syntax is idealadd"("nf",x,y)".

       idealaddtoone"("nf",x,{y})"

       "x" and "y" being two co-prime integral ideals (given in any form),
       this gives a two-component row vector "[a,b]" such that "a belongs to
       x", "b belongs to y" and "a+b = 1".

       The alternative syntax "idealaddtoone("nf",v)", is supported, where "v"
       is a "k"-component vector of ideals (given in any form) which sum to
       Z"_K". This outputs a "k"-component vector "e" such that "e[i] belongs
       to x[i]" for "1 <= i <= k" and sum"_{1 <= i <= k}e[i] = 1".

       The library syntax is idealaddtoone0"("nf",x,y)", where an omitted "y"
       is coded as "NULL".

       idealappr"("nf",x,{"flag" = 0})"

       if "x" is a fractional ideal (given in any form), gives an element
       alpha in nf such that for all prime ideals p such that the valuation of
       "x" at p is non-zero, we have "v_{"p"}("alpha") = v_{"p"}(x)", and.
       "v_{"p"}("alpha") >= 0" for all other "{"p"}".

       If flag is non-zero, "x" must be given as a prime ideal factorization,
       as output by "idealfactor", but possibly with zero or negative expo-
       nents.  This yields an element alpha such that for all prime ideals p
       occurring in "x", "v_{"p"}("alpha")" is equal to the exponent of p in
       "x", and for all other prime ideals, "v_{"p"}("alpha") >= 0". This gen-
       eralizes "idealappr("nf",x,0)" since zero exponents are allowed. Note
       that the algorithm used is slightly different, so that "ide-
       alapp("nf",idealfactor("nf",x))" may not be the same as "ide-
       alappr("nf",x,1)".

       The library syntax is idealappr0"("nf",x,"flag")".

       idealchinese"("nf",x,y)"

       "x" being a prime ideal factorization (i.e. a 2 by 2 matrix whose first
       column contain prime ideals, and the second column integral exponents),
       "y" a vector of elements in nf indexed by the ideals in "x", computes
       an element "b" such that

       "v_"p"(b - y_"p") >= v_"p"(x)" for all prime ideals in "x" and
       "v_"p"(b) >= 0" for all other p.

       The library syntax is idealchinese"("nf",x,y)".

       idealcoprime"("nf",x,y)"

       given two integral ideals "x" and "y" in the number field nf, finds a
       beta in the field, expressed on the integral basis nf"[7]", such that
       beta".y" is an integral ideal coprime to "x".

       The library syntax is idealcoprime"("nf",x)".

       idealdiv"("nf",x,y,{"flag" = 0})"

       quotient "x.y^{-1}" of the two ideals "x" and "y" in the number field
       nf. The result is given in HNF.

       If flag is non-zero, the quotient "x.y^{-1}" is assumed to be an inte-
       gral ideal. This can be much faster when the norm of the quotient is
       small even though the norms of "x" and "y" are large.

       The library syntax is idealdiv0"("nf",x,y,"flag")". Also available are
       idealdiv"("nf",x,y)" (flag" = 0") and idealdivexact"("nf",x,y)" (flag"
       = 1").

       idealfactor"("nf",x)"

       factors into prime ideal powers the ideal "x" in the number field nf.
       The output format is similar to the "factor" function, and the prime
       ideals are represented in the form output by the "idealprimedec" func-
       tion, i.e. as 5-element vectors.

       The library syntax is idealfactor"("nf",x)".

       idealhnf"("nf",a,{b})"

       gives the Hermite normal form matrix of the ideal "a". The ideal can be
       given in any form whatsoever (typically by an algebraic number if it is
       principal, by a Z"_K"-system of generators, as a prime ideal as given
       by "idealprimedec", or by a Z-basis).

       If "b" is not omitted, assume the ideal given was "a"Z"_K+b"Z"_K",
       where "a" and "b" are elements of "K" given either as vectors on the
       integral basis nf"[7]" or as algebraic numbers.

       The library syntax is idealhnf0"("nf",a,b)" where an omitted "b" is
       coded as "NULL".	 Also available is idealhermite"("nf",a)" ("b" omit-
       ted).

       idealintersect"("nf",x,y)"

       intersection of the two ideals "x" and "y" in the number field nf. When
       "x" and "y" are given by Z-bases, this does not depend on nf and can be
       used to compute the intersection of any two Z-modules. The result is
       given in HNF.

       The library syntax is idealintersect"("nf",x,y)".

       idealinv"("nf",x)"

       inverse of the ideal "x" in the number field nf. The result is the Her-
       mite normal form of the inverse of the ideal, together with the oppo-
       site of the Archimedean information if it is given.

       The library syntax is idealinv"("nf",x)".

       ideallist"("nf","bound",{"flag" = 4})"

       computes the list of all ideals of norm less or equal to bound in the
       number field nf. The result is a row vector with exactly bound compo-
       nents.  Each component is itself a row vector containing the informa-
       tion about ideals of a given norm, in no specific order. This informa-
       tion can be either the HNF of the ideal or the "idealstar" with possi-
       bly some additional information.

       If flag is present, its binary digits are toggles meaning

	 1: give also the generators in the "idealstar".

	 2: output "[L,U]", where "L" is as before and "U" is a vector of
       "zinternallog"s of the units.

	 4: give only the ideals and not the "idealstar" or the "ideallog" of
       the units.

       The library syntax is ideallist0"("nf","bound","flag")", where bound
       must be a C long integer. Also available is ideallist"("nf","bound")",
       corresponding to the case flag" = 0".

       ideallistarch"("nf","list",{"arch" = []},{"flag" = 0})"

       vector of vectors of all "idealstarinit" (see "idealstar") of all mod-
       ules in list, with Archimedean part arch added (void if omitted). list
       is a vector of big ideals, as output by "ideallist""(..., "flag")" for
       instance. flag is optional; its binary digits are toggles meaning: 1:
       give generators as well, 2: list format is "[L,U]" (see "ideallist").

       The library syntax is ideallistarch0"("nf","list","arch","flag")",
       where an omitted arch is coded as "NULL".

       ideallog"("nf",x,"bid")"

       nf being a number field, bid being a ``big ideal'' as output by "ideal-
       star" and "x" being a non-necessarily integral element of nf which must
       have valuation equal to 0 at all prime ideals dividing "I = "bid"[1]",
       computes the ``discrete logarithm'' of "x" on the generators given in
       bid"[2]".  In other words, if "g_i" are these generators, of orders
       "d_i" respectively, the result is a column vector of integers "(x_i)"
       such that "0 <= x_i < d_i" and

	"x = "prod"_ig_i^{x_i} (mod ^*I) ."

       Note that when "I" is a module, this implies also sign conditions on
       the embeddings.

       The library syntax is zideallog"("nf",x,"bid")".

       idealmin"("nf",x,{"vdir"})"

       computes a minimum of the ideal "x" in the direction vdir in the number
       field nf.

       The library syntax is minideal"("nf",x,"vdir","prec")", where an omit-
       ted vdir is coded as "NULL".

       idealmul"("nf",x,y,{"flag" = 0})"

       ideal multiplication of the ideals "x" and "y" in the number field nf.
       The result is a generating set for the ideal product with at most "n"
       elements, and is in Hermite normal form if either "x" or "y" is in HNF
       or is a prime ideal as output by "idealprimedec", and this is given
       together with the sum of the Archimedean information in "x" and "y" if
       both are given.

       If flag is non-zero, reduce the result using "idealred".

       The library syntax is idealmul"("nf",x,y)" (flag" = 0") or ideal-
       mulred"("nf",x,y,"prec")" (flag" ! = 0"), where as usual, prec is a C
       long integer representing the precision.

       idealnorm"("nf",x)"

       computes the norm of the ideal "x" in the number field nf.

       The library syntax is idealnorm"("nf", x)".

       idealpow"("nf",x,k,{"flag" = 0})"

       computes the "k"-th power of the ideal "x" in the number field nf. "k"
       can be positive, negative or zero. The result is NOT reduced, it is
       really the "k"-th ideal power, and is given in HNF.

       If flag is non-zero, reduce the result using "idealred". Note however
       that this is NOT the same as as "idealpow("nf",x,k)" followed by reduc-
       tion, since the reduction is performed throughout the powering process.

       The library syntax corresponding to flag" = 0" is idealpow"("nf",x,k)".
       If "k" is a "long", you can use idealpows"("nf",x,k)". Corresponding to
       flag" = 1" is idealpowred"("nf",vp,k,"prec")", where prec is a "long".

       idealprimedec"("nf",p)"

       computes the prime ideal decomposition of the prime number "p" in the
       number field nf. "p" must be a (positive) prime number. Note that the
       fact that "p" is prime is not checked, so if a non-prime number "p" is
       given it may lead to unpredictable results.

       The result is a vector of 5-component vectors, each representing one of
       the prime ideals above "p" in the number field nf. The representation
       "vp = [p,a,e,f,b]" of a prime ideal means the following. The prime
       ideal is equal to "p"Z"_K+"alphaZ"_K" where Z"_K" is the ring of inte-
       gers of the field and alpha" = "sum"_i a_i"omega"_i" where the
       omega"_i" form the integral basis nf".zk", "e" is the ramification
       index, "f" is the residual index, and "b" is an "n"-component column
       vector representing a beta" belongs to "Z"_K" such that "vp^{-1} =
       "Z"_K+"beta"/p"Z"_K" which will be useful for computing valuations, but
       which the user can ignore. The number alpha is guaranteed to have a
       valuation equal to 1 at the prime ideal (this is automatic if "e > 1").

       The library syntax is idealprimedec"("nf",p)".

       idealprincipal"("nf",x)"

       creates the principal ideal generated by the algebraic number "x"
       (which must be of type integer, rational or polmod) in the number field
       nf. The result is a one-column matrix.

       The library syntax is principalideal"("nf",x)".

       idealred"("nf",I,{"vdir" = 0})"

       LLL reduction of the ideal "I" in the number field nf, along the direc-
       tion vdir.  If vdir is present, it must be an "r1+r2"-component vector
       ("r1" and "r2" number of real and complex places of nf as usual).

       This function finds a ``small'' "a" in "I" (it is an LLL pseudo-minimum
       along direction vdir). The result is the Hermite normal form of the
       LLL-reduced ideal "r I/a", where "r" is a rational number such that the
       resulting ideal is integral and primitive. This is often, but not
       always, a reduced ideal in the sense of Buchmann. If "I" is an idele,
       the logarithmic embeddings of "a" are subtracted to the Archimedean
       part.

       More often than not, a principal ideal will yield the identity matrix.
       This is a quick and dirty way to check if ideals are principal without
       computing a full "bnf" structure, but it's not a necessary condition;
       hence, a non-trivial result doesn't prove the ideal is non-trivial in
       the class group.

       Note that this is not the same as the LLL reduction of the lattice "I"
       since ideal operations are involved.

       The library syntax is ideallllred"("nf",x,"vdir","prec")", where an
       omitted vdir is coded as "NULL".

       idealstar"("nf",I,{"flag" = 1})"

       nf being a number field, and "I" either and ideal in any form, or a row
       vector whose first component is an ideal and whose second component is
       a row vector of "r_1" 0 or 1, outputs necessary data for computing in
       the group "("Z"_K/I)^*".

       If flag" = 2", the result is a 5-component vector "w". "w[1]" is the
       ideal or module "I" itself. "w[2]" is the structure of the group. The
       other components are difficult to describe and are used only in con-
       junction with the function "ideallog".

       If flag" = 1" (default), as flag" = 2", but do not compute explicit
       generators for the cyclic components, which saves time.

       If flag" = 0", computes the structure of "("Z"_K/I)^*" as a 3-component
       vector "v". "v[1]" is the order, "v[2]" is the vector of SNF cyclic
       components and "v[3]" the corresponding generators. When the row vector
       is explicitly included, the non-zero elements of this vector are con-
       sidered as real embeddings of nf in the order given by "polroots",
       i.e. in nf[6] (nf".roots"), and then "I" is a module with components at
       infinity.

       To solve discrete logarithms (using "ideallog"), you have to choose
       flag" = 2".

       The library syntax is idealstar0"("nf",I,"flag")".

       idealtwoelt"("nf",x,{a})"

       computes a two-element representation of the ideal "x" in the number
       field nf, using a straightforward (exponential time) search. "x" can be
       an ideal in any form, (including perhaps an Archimedean part, which is
       ignored) and the result is a row vector "[a,"alpha"]" with two compo-
       nents such that "x = a"Z"_K+"alphaZ"_K" and "a belongs to "Z, where "a"
       is the one passed as argument if any. If "x" is given by at least two
       generators, "a" is chosen to be the positive generator of "x" cap Z.

       Note that when an explicit "a" is given, we use an asymptotically
       faster method, however in practice it is usually slower.

       The library syntax is ideal_two_elt0"("nf",x,a)", where an omitted "a"
       is entered as "NULL".

       idealval"("nf",x,"vp")"

       gives the valuation of the ideal "x" at the prime ideal vp in the num-
       ber field nf, where vp must be a 5-component vector as given by "ideal-
       primedec".

       The library syntax is idealval"("nf",x,"vp")", and the result is a
       "long" integer.

       ideleprincipal"("nf",x)"

       creates the principal idele generated by the algebraic number "x"
       (which must be of type integer, rational or polmod) in the number field
       nf. The result is a two-component vector, the first being a one-column
       matrix representing the corresponding principal ideal, and the second
       being the vector with "r_1+r_2" components giving the complex logarith-
       mic embedding of "x".

       The library syntax is principalidele"("nf",x)".

       matalgtobasis"("nf",x)"

       nf being a number field in "nfinit" format, and "x" a matrix whose
       coefficients are expressed as polmods in nf, transforms this matrix
       into a matrix whose coefficients are expressed on the integral basis of
       nf. This is the same as applying "nfalgtobasis" to each entry, but it
       would be dangerous to use the same name.

       The library syntax is matalgtobasis"("nf",x)".

       matbasistoalg"("nf",x)"

       nf being a number field in "nfinit" format, and "x" a matrix whose
       coefficients are expressed as column vectors on the integral basis of
       nf, transforms this matrix into a matrix whose coefficients are alge-
       braic numbers expressed as polmods. This is the same as applying "nfba-
       sistoalg" to each entry, but it would be dangerous to use the same
       name.

       The library syntax is matbasistoalg"("nf",x)".

       modreverse"(a)"

       "a" being a polmod A(X) modulo T(X), finds the ``reverse polmod'' B(X)
       modulo Q(X), where "Q" is the minimal polynomial of "a", which must be
       equal to the degree of "T", and such that if theta is a root of "T"
       then theta" = B("alpha")" for a certain root alpha of "Q".

       This is very useful when one changes the generating element in alge-
       braic extensions.

       The library syntax is polmodrecip"(x)".

       newtonpoly"(x,p)"

       gives the vector of the slopes of the Newton polygon of the polynomial
       "x" with respect to the prime number "p". The "n" components of the
       vector are in decreasing order, where "n" is equal to the degree of
       "x". Vertical slopes occur iff the constant coefficient of "x" is zero
       and are denoted by "VERYBIGINT", the biggest single precision integer
       representable on the machine ("2^{31}-1" (resp. "2^{63}-1") on 32-bit
       (resp. 64-bit) machines), see "Label se:valuation".

       The library syntax is newtonpoly"(x,p)".

       nfalgtobasis"("nf",x)"

       this is the inverse function of "nfbasistoalg". Given an object "x"
       whose entries are expressed as algebraic numbers in the number field
       nf, transforms it so that the entries are expressed as a column vector
       on the integral basis nf".zk".

       The library syntax is algtobasis"("nf",x)".

       nfbasis"(x,{"flag" = 0},{p})"

       integral basis of the number field defined by the irreducible, prefer-
       ably monic, polynomial "x", using a modified version of the round 4
       algorithm by default. The binary digits of flag have the following
       meaning:

       1: assume that no square of a prime greater than the default "prime-
       limit" divides the discriminant of "x", i.e. that the index of "x" has
       only small prime divisors.

       2: use round 2 algorithm. For small degrees and coefficient size, this
       is sometimes a little faster. (This program is the translation into C
       of a program written by David Ford in Algeb.)

       Thus for instance, if flag" = 3", this uses the round 2 algorithm and
       outputs an order which will be maximal at all the small primes.

       If "p" is present, we assume (without checking!) that it is the two-
       column matrix of the factorization of the discriminant of the polyno-
       mial "x". Note that it does not have to be a complete factorization.
       This is especially useful if only a local integral basis for some small
       set of places is desired: only factors with exponents greater or equal
       to 2 will be considered.

       The library syntax is nfbasis0"(x,"flag",p)". An extended version is
       nfbasis"(x,&d,"flag",p)", where "d" will receive the discriminant of
       the number field (not of the polynomial "x"), and an omitted "p" should
       be input as "gzero". Also available are base"(x,&d)" (flag" = 0"),
       base2"(x,&d)" (flag" = 2") and factoredbase"(x,p,&d)".

       nfbasistoalg"("nf",x)"

       this is the inverse function of "nfalgtobasis". Given an object "x"
       whose entries are expressed on the integral basis nf".zk", transforms
       it into an object whose entries are algebraic numbers (i.e. polmods).

       The library syntax is basistoalg"("nf",x)".

       nfdetint"("nf",x)"

       given a pseudo-matrix "x", computes a non-zero ideal contained in
       (i.e. multiple of) the determinant of "x". This is particularly useful
       in conjunction with "nfhnfmod".

       The library syntax is nfdetint"("nf",x)".

       nfdisc"(x,{"flag" = 0},{p})"

       field discriminant of the number field defined by the integral, prefer-
       ably monic, irreducible polynomial "x". flag and "p" are exactly as in
       "nfbasis". That is, "p" provides the matrix of a partial factorization
       of the discriminant of "x", and binary digits of flag are as follows:

       1: assume that no square of a prime greater than "primelimit" divides
       the discriminant.

       2: use the round 2 algorithm, instead of the default round 4.  This
       should be slower except maybe for polynomials of small degree and coef-
       ficients.

       The library syntax is nfdiscf0"(x,"flag",p)" where, to omit "p", you
       should input "gzero". You can also use discf"(x)" (flag" = 0").

       nfeltdiv"("nf",x,y)"

       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, computes their quotient "x/y" in
       the number field nf.

       The library syntax is element_div"("nf",x,y)".

       nfeltdiveuc"("nf",x,y)"

       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, computes an algebraic integer "q"
       in the number field nf such that the components of "x-qy" are reason-
       ably small. In fact, this is functionally identical to "round(nfelt-
       div("nf",x,y))".

       The library syntax is nfdiveuc"("nf",x,y)".

       nfeltdivmodpr"("nf",x,y,"pr")"

       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf and pr a prime ideal in "modpr"
       format (see "nfmodprinit"), computes their quotient "x / y" modulo the
       prime ideal pr.

       The library syntax is element_divmodpr"("nf",x,y,"pr")".

       nfeltdivrem"("nf",x,y)"

       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, gives a two-element row vector
       "[q,r]" such that "x = qy+r", "q" is an algebraic integer in nf, and
       the components of "r" are reasonably small.

       The library syntax is nfdivres"("nf",x,y)".

       nfeltmod"("nf",x,y)"

       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, computes an element "r" of nf of
       the form "r = x-qy" with "q" and algebraic integer, and such that "r"
       is small. This is functionally identical to

	"x - nfeltmul("nf",round(nfeltdiv("nf",x,y)),y)."

       The library syntax is nfmod"("nf",x,y)".

       nfeltmul"("nf",x,y)"

       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf, computes their product "x*y" in
       the number field nf.

       The library syntax is element_mul"("nf",x,y)".

       nfeltmulmodpr"("nf",x,y,"pr")"

       given two elements "x" and "y" in nf and pr a prime ideal in "modpr"
       format (see "nfmodprinit"), computes their product "x*y" modulo the
       prime ideal pr.

       The library syntax is element_mulmodpr"("nf",x,y,"pr")".

       nfeltpow"("nf",x,k)"

       given an element "x" in nf, and a positive or negative integer "k",
       computes "x^k" in the number field nf.

       The library syntax is element_pow"("nf",x,k)".

       nfeltpowmodpr"("nf",x,k,"pr")"

       given an element "x" in nf, an integer "k" and a prime ideal pr in
       "modpr" format (see "nfmodprinit"), computes "x^k" modulo the prime
       ideal pr.

       The library syntax is element_powmodpr"("nf",x,k,"pr")".

       nfeltreduce"("nf",x,"ideal")"

       given an ideal in Hermite normal form and an element "x" of the number
       field nf, finds an element "r" in nf such that "x-r" belongs to the
       ideal and "r" is small.

       The library syntax is element_reduce"("nf",x,"ideal")".

       nfeltreducemodpr"("nf",x,"pr")"

       given an element "x" of the number field nf and a prime ideal pr in
       "modpr" format compute a canonical representative for the class of "x"
       modulo pr.

       The library syntax is nfreducemodpr2"("nf",x,"pr")".

       nfeltval"("nf",x,"pr")"

       given an element "x" in nf and a prime ideal pr in the format output by
       "idealprimedec", computes their the valuation at pr of the element "x".
       The same result could be obtained using "idealval("nf",x,"pr")" (since
       "x" would then be converted to a principal ideal), but it would be less
       efficient.

       The library syntax is element_val"("nf",x,"pr")", and the result is a
       "long".

       nffactor"("nf",x)"

       factorization of the univariate polynomial "x" over the number field nf
       given by "nfinit". "x" has coefficients in nf (i.e. either scalar,
       polmod, polynomial or column vector). The main variable of nf must be
       of lower priority than that of "x" (in other words, the variable number
       of nf must be greater than that of "x"). However if the polynomial
       defining the number field occurs explicitly  in the coefficients of "x"
       (as modulus of a "t_POLMOD"), its main variable must be the same as the
       main variable of "x". For example,

	 ? nf = nfinit(y^2 + 1);
	 ? nffactor(nf, x^2 + y); \\ OK
	 ? nffactor(nf, x^2 + Mod(y, y^2+1)); \\  OK
	 ? nffactor(nf, x^2 + Mod(z, z^2+1)); \\  WRONG

       The library syntax is nffactor"("nf",x)".

       nffactormod"("nf",x,"pr")"

       factorization of the univariate polynomial "x" modulo the prime ideal
       pr in the number field nf. "x" can have coefficients in the number
       field (scalar, polmod, polynomial, column vector) or modulo the prime
       ideal (integermod modulo the rational prime under pr, polmod or polyno-
       mial with integermod coefficients, column vector of integermod). The
       prime ideal pr must be in the format output by "idealprimedec". The
       main variable of nf must be of lower priority than that of "x" (in
       other words the variable number of nf must be greater than that of
       "x"). However if the coefficients of the number field occur explicitly
       (as polmods) as coefficients of "x", the variable of these polmods must
       be the same as the main variable of "t" (see "nffactor").

       The library syntax is nffactormod"("nf",x,"pr")".

       nfgaloisapply"("nf","aut",x)"

       nf being a number field as output by "nfinit", and aut being a Galois
       automorphism of nf expressed either as a polynomial or a polmod (such
       automorphisms being found using for example one of the variants of
       "nfgaloisconj"), computes the action of the automorphism aut on the
       object "x" in the number field. "x" can be an element (scalar, polmod,
       polynomial or column vector) of the number field, an ideal (either
       given by Z"_K"-generators or by a Z-basis), a prime ideal (given as a
       5-element row vector) or an idele (given as a 2-element row vector).
       Because of possible confusion with elements and ideals, other vector or
       matrix arguments are forbidden.

       The library syntax is galoisapply"("nf","aut",x)".

       nfgaloisconj"("nf",{"flag" = 0},{d})"

       nf being a number field as output by "nfinit", computes the conjugates
       of a root "r" of the non-constant polynomial "x = "nf"[1]" expressed as
       polynomials in "r". This can be used even if the number field nf is not
       Galois since some conjugates may lie in the field. As a note to old-
       timers of PARI, starting with version 2.0.17 this function works much
       better than in earlier versions.

       nf can simply be a polynomial if flag" ! = 1".

       If no flags or flag" = 0", if nf is a number field use a combination of
       flag 4 and 1 and the result is always complete, else use a combination
       of flag 4 and 2 and the result is subject to the restriction of flag" =
       2", but a warning is issued when it is not proven complete.

       If flag" = 1", use "nfroots" (require a number field).

       If flag" = 2", use complex approximations to the roots and an integral
       LLL. The result is not guaranteed to be complete: some conjugates may
       be missing (no warning issued), especially so if the corresponding
       polynomial has a huge index. In that case, increasing the default pre-
       cision may help.

       If flag" = 4", use Allombert's algorithm and permutation testing. If
       the field is Galois with ``weakly'' super solvable Galois group, return
       the complete list of automorphisms, else only the identity element. If
       present, "d" is assumed to be a multiple of the least common denomina-
       tor of the conjugates expressed as polynomial in a root of pol.

       A group G is ``weakly'' super solvable if it contains a super solvable
       normal subgroup "H" such that "G = H" , or "G/H	~  A_4" , or "G/H  ~
       S_4". Abelian and nilpotent groups are ``weakly'' super solvable.  In
       practice, almost all groups of small order are ``weakly'' super solv-
       able, the exceptions having order 36(1 exception), 48(2), 56(1), 60(1),
       72(5), 75(1), 80(1), 96(10) and " >= 108".

       Hence flag" = 4" permits to quickly check whether a polynomial of order
       strictly less than 36 is Galois or not. This method is much faster than
       "nfroots" and can be applied to polynomials of degree larger than 50.

       The library syntax is galoisconj0"("nf","flag",d,"prec")". Also avail-
       able are galoisconj"("nf")" for flag" = 0", galois-
       conj2"("nf",n,"prec")" for flag" = 2" where "n" is a bound on the num-
       ber of conjugates, and  galoisconj4"("nf",d)" corresponding to flag" =
       4".

       nfhilbert"("nf",a,b,{"pr"})"

       if pr is omitted, compute the global Hilbert symbol "(a,b)" in nf, that
       is 1 if "x^2 - a y^2 - b z^2" has a non trivial solution "(x,y,z)" in
       nf, and "-1" otherwise. Otherwise compute the local symbol modulo the
       prime ideal pr (as output by "idealprimedec").

       The library syntax is nfhilbert"("nf",a,b,"pr")", where an omitted pr
       is coded as "NULL".

       nfhnf"("nf",x)"

       given a pseudo-matrix "(A,I)", finds a pseudo-basis in Hermite normal
       form of the module it generates.

       The library syntax is nfhermite"("nf",x)".

       nfhnfmod"("nf",x,"detx")"

       given a pseudo-matrix "(A,I)" and an ideal detx which is contained in
       (read integral multiple of) the determinant of "(A,I)", finds a pseudo-
       basis in Hermite normal form of the module generated by "(A,I)". This
       avoids coefficient explosion.  detx can be computed using the function
       "nfdetint".

       The library syntax is nfhermitemod"("nf",x,"detx")".

       nfinit"("pol",{"flag" = 0})"

       pol being a non-constant, preferably monic, irreducible polynomial in
       Z"[X]", initializes a number field structure ("nf") associated to the
       field "K" defined by pol. As such, it's a technical object passed as
       the first argument to most "nf"xxx functions, but it contains some
       information which may be directly useful. Access to this information
       via member functions is prefered since the specific data organization
       specified below may change in the future. Currently, "nf" is a row vec-
       tor with 9 components:

       nf"[1]" contains the polynomial pol (nf".pol").

       nf"[2]" contains "[r1,r2]" (nf".sign"), the number of real and complex
       places of "K".

       nf"[3]" contains the discriminant d(K) (nf".disc") of "K".

       nf"[4]" contains the index of nf"[1]", i.e. "["Z"_K : "Z"["theta"]]",
       where theta is any root of nf"[1]".

       nf"[5]" is a vector containing 7 matrices "M", "MC", "T2", "T", "MD",
       "TI", "MDI" useful for certain computations in the number field "K".

	 * "M" is the "(r1+r2) x n" matrix whose columns represent the numeri-
       cal values of the conjugates of the elements of the integral basis.

	 * "MC" is essentially the conjugate of the transpose of "M", except
       that the last "r2" columns are also multiplied by 2.

	 * "T2" is an "n x n" matrix equal to the real part of the product
       "MC.M" (which is a real positive definite symmetric matrix), the so-
       called "T_2"-matrix (nf".t2").

	 * "T" is the "n x n" matrix whose coefficients are
       "Tr("omega"_i"omega"_j)" where the omega"_i" are the elements of the
       integral basis. Note that "T = \overline{MC}.M" and in particular that
       "T = T_2" if the field is totally real (in practice "T_2" will have
       real approximate entries and "T" will have integer entries). Note also
       that
	det "(T)" is equal to the discriminant of the field "K".

	 * The columns of "MD" (nf".diff") express a Z-basis of the different
       of "K" on the integral basis.

	 * "TI" is equal to "d(K)T^{-1}", which has integral coefficients.
       Note that, understood as as ideal, the matrix "T^{-1}" generates the
       codifferent ideal.

	 * Finally, "MDI" is a two-element representation (for faster ideal
       product) of d(K) times the codifferent ideal (nf".disc*"nf".codiff",
       which is an integral ideal). "MDI" is only used in "idealinv".

       nf"[6]" is the vector containing the "r1+r2" roots (nf".roots") of
       nf"[1]" corresponding to the "r1+r2" embeddings of the number field
       into C (the first "r1" components are real, the next "r2" have positive
       imaginary part).

       nf"[7]" is an integral basis in Hermite normal form for Z"_K" (nf".zk")
       expressed on the powers of theta.

       nf"[8]" is the "n x n" integral matrix expressing the power basis in
       terms of the integral basis, and finally

       nf"[9]" is the "n x n^2" matrix giving the multiplication table of the
       integral basis.

       If a non monic polynomial is input, "nfinit" will transform it into a
       monic one, then reduce it (see flag" = 3"). It is allowed, though not
       very useful given the existence of nfnewprec, to input a "nf" or a
       "bnf" instead of a polynomial.

       The special input format "[x,B]" is also accepted where "x" is a poly-
       nomial as above and "B" is the integer basis, as computed by "nfbasis".
       This can be useful since "nfinit" uses the round 4 algorithm by
       default, which can be very slow in pathological cases where round 2
       ("nfbasis(x,2)") would succeed very quickly.

       If flag" = 2": pol is changed into another polynomial "P" defining the
       same number field, which is as simple as can easily be found using the
       "polred" algorithm, and all the subsequent computations are done using
       this new polynomial. In particular, the first component of the result
       is the modified polynomial.

       If flag" = 3", does a "polred" as in case 2, but outputs
       "["nf",Mod(a,P)]", where nf is as before and "Mod(a,P) = Mod(x,"pol")"
       gives the change of variables. This is implicit when pol is not monic:
       first a linear change of variables is performed, to get a monic polyno-
       mial, then a "polred" reduction.

       If flag" = 4", as 2 but uses a partial "polred".

       If flag" = 5", as 3 using a partial "polred".

       The library syntax is nfinit0"(x,"flag","prec")".

       nfisideal"("nf",x)"

       returns 1 if "x" is an ideal in the number field nf, 0 otherwise.

       The library syntax is isideal"(x)".

       nfisincl"(x,y)"

       tests whether the number field "K" defined by the polynomial "x" is
       conjugate to a subfield of the field "L" defined by "y" (where "x" and
       "y" must be in Q"[X]"). If they are not, the output is the number 0. If
       they are, the output is a vector of polynomials, each polynomial "a"
       representing an embedding of "K" into "L", i.e. being such that "y | x
       o a".

       If "y" is a number field (nf), a much faster algorithm is used (factor-
       ing "x" over "y" using "nffactor"). Before version 2.0.14, this wasn't
       guaranteed to return all the embeddings, hence was triggered by a spe-
       cial flag. This is no more the case.

       The library syntax is nfisincl"(x,y,"flag")".

       nfisisom"(x,y)"

       as "nfisincl", but tests for isomorphism. If either "x" or "y" is a
       number field, a much faster algorithm will be used.

       The library syntax is nfisisom"(x,y,"flag")".

       nfnewprec"("nf")"

       transforms the number field nf into the corresponding data using cur-
       rent (usually larger) precision. This function works as expected if nf
       is in fact a bnf (update bnf to current precision) but may be quite
       slow (many generators of principal ideals have to be computed).

       The library syntax is nfnewprec"("nf","prec")".

       nfkermodpr"("nf",a,"pr")"

       kernel of the matrix "a" in Z"_K/"pr, where pr is in modpr format (see
       "nfmodprinit").

       The library syntax is nfkermodpr"("nf",a,"pr")".

       nfmodprinit"("nf","pr")"

       transforms the prime ideal pr into "modpr" format necessary for all
       operations modulo pr in the number field nf. Returns a two-component
       vector "[P,a]", where "P" is the Hermite normal form of pr, and "a" is
       an integral element congruent to 1 modulo pr, and congruent to 0 modulo
       "p / pr^e". Here "p = "Z	 cap  pr and "e" is the absolute ramification
       index.

       The library syntax is nfmodprinit"("nf","pr")".

       nfsubfields"("nf",{d = 0})"

       finds all subfields of degree "d" of the number field nf (all subfields
       if "d" is null or omitted).  The result is a vector of subfields, each
       being given by "[g,h]", where "g" is an absolute equation and "h"
       expresses one of the roots of "g" in terms of the root "x" of the poly-
       nomial defining nf. This is a crude implementation by M. Olivier of an
       algorithm due to J. Klueners.

       The library syntax is subfields"("nf",d)".

       nfroots"("nf",x)"

       roots of the polynomial "x" in the number field nf given by "nfinit"
       without multiplicity. "x" has coefficients in the number field (scalar,
       polmod, polynomial, column vector). The main variable of nf must be of
       lower priority than that of "x" (in other words the variable number of
       nf must be greater than that of "x"). However if the coefficients of
       the number field occur explicitly (as polmods) as coefficients of "x",
       the variable of these polmods must be the same as the main variable of
       "t" (see "nffactor").

       The library syntax is nfroots"("nf",x)".

       nfrootsof1"("nf")"

       computes the number of roots of unity "w" and a primitive "w"-th root
       of unity (expressed on the integral basis) belonging to the number
       field nf. The result is a two-component vector "[w,z]" where "z" is a
       column vector expressing a primitive "w"-th root of unity on the inte-
       gral basis nf".zk".

       The library syntax is rootsof1"("nf")".

       nfsnf"("nf",x)"

       given a torsion module "x" as a 3-component row vector "[A,I,J]" where
       "A" is a square invertible "n x n" matrix, "I" and "J" are two ideal
       lists, outputs an ideal list "d_1,...,d_n" which is the Smith normal
       form of "x". In other words, "x" is isomorphic to Z"_K/d_1" oplus "..."
       oplus Z"_K/d_n" and "d_i" divides "d_{i-1}" for "i >= 2".  The link
       between "x" and "[A,I,J]" is as follows: if "e_i" is the canonical
       basis of "K^n", "I = [b_1,...,b_n]" and "J = [a_1,...,a_n]", then "x"
       is isomorphic to

	" (b_1e_1" oplus "..." oplus " b_ne_n) / (a_1A_1" oplus "..." oplus "
       a_nA_n)
	, "

       where the "A_j" are the columns of the matrix "A". Note that every fi-
       nitely generated torsion module can be given in this way, and even with
       "b_i = Z_K" for all "i".

       The library syntax is nfsmith"("nf",x)".

       nfsolvemodpr"("nf",a,b,"pr")"

       solution of "a.x = b" in Z"_K/"pr, where "a" is a matrix and "b" a col-
       umn vector, and where pr is in modpr format (see "nfmodprinit").

       The library syntax is nfsolvemodpr"("nf",a,b,"pr")".

       polcompositum"(x,y,{"flag" = 0})"

       "x" and "y" being polynomials in Z"[X]" in the same variable, outputs a
       vector giving the list of all possible composita of the number fields
       defined by "x" and "y", if "x" and "y" are irreducible, or of the cor-
       responding etale algebras, if they are only squarefree. Returns an
       error if one of the polynomials is not squarefree. When one of the
       polynomials is irreducible (say "x"), it is often much faster to use
       "nffactor(nfinit(x), y)" then "rnfequation".

       If flag" = 1", outputs a vector of 4-component vectors "[z,a,b,k]",
       where "z" ranges through the list of all possible compositums as above,
       and "a" (resp. "b") expresses the root of "x" (resp. "y") as a polmod
       in a root of "z", and "k" is a small integer k such that "a+kb" is the
       chosen root of "z".

       The compositum will quite often be defined by a complicated polynomial,
       which it is advisable to reduce before further work. Here is a simple
       example involving the field Q"("zeta"_5, 5^{1/5})":

	 ? z = polcompositum(x^5 - 5, polcyclo(5), 1)[1];
	 ? pol = z[1]		      \\ pol defines the compositum
	 %2 = x^20 + 5*x^19 + 15*x^18 + 35*x^17 + 70*x^16 + 141*x^15 + 260*x^14 \
	   + 355*x^13 + 95*x^12 - 1460*x^11 - 3279*x^10 - 3660*x^9 - 2005*x^8	 \
	   + 705*x^7 + 9210*x^6 + 13506*x^5 + 7145*x^4 - 2740*x^3 + 1040*x^2	 \
	   - 320*x + 256
	 ? a = z[2]; a^5 - 5	      \\ a is a fifth root of 5
	 %3 = 0
	 ? z = polredabs(pol, 1);     \\ look for a simpler polynomial
	 ? pol = z[1]
	 %5 = x^20 + 25*x^10 + 5
	 ? a = subst(a.pol, x, z[2])  \\ a in the new coordinates
	 %6 = Mod(-5/22*x^19 + 1/22*x^14 - 123/22*x^9 + 9/11*x^4, x^20 + 25*x^10 + 5)

       The library syntax is polcompositum0"(x,y,"flag")".

       polgalois"(x)"

       Galois group of the non-constant polynomial "x belongs to "Q"[X]". In
       the present version 2.2.0, "x" must be irreducible and the degree of
       "x" must be less than or equal to 7. On certain versions for which the
       data file of Galois resolvents has been installed (available in the
       Unix distribution as a separate package), degrees 8, 9, 10 and 11 are
       also implemented.

       The output is a 3-component vector "[n,s,k]" with the following mean-
       ing: "n" is the cardinality of the group, "s" is its signature ("s = 1"
       if the group is a subgroup of the alternating group "A_n", "s = -1"
       otherwise), and "k" is the number of the group corresponding to a given
       pair "(n,s)" ("k = 1" except in 2 cases). Specifically, the groups are
       coded as follows, using standard notations (see GTM 138, quoted at the
       beginning of this section; see also ``The transitive groups of degree
       up to eleven'', by G. Butler and J. McKay in Communications in Algebra,
       vol. 11, 1983, pp. 863--911):

       In degree 1: "S_1 = [1,-1,1]".

       In degree 2: "S_2 = [2,-1,1]".

       In degree 3: "A_3 = C_3 = [3,1,1]", "S_3 = [6,-1,1]".

       In degree 4: "C_4 = [4,-1,1]", "V_4 = [4,1,1]", "D_4 = [8,-1,1]", "A_4
       = [12,1,1]", "S_4 = [24,-1,1]".

       In degree 5: "C_5 = [5,1,1]", "D_5 = [10,1,1]", "M_{20} = [20,-1,1]",
       "A_5 = [60,1,1]", "S_5 = [120,-1,1]".

       In degree 6: "C_6 = [6,-1,1]", "S_3 = [6,-1,2]", "D_6 = [12,-1,1]",
       "A_4 = [12,1,1]", "G_{18} = [18,-1,1]", "S_4^ -= [24,-1,1]", "A_4 x C_2
       = [24,-1,2]", "S_4^ += [24,1,1]", "G_{36}^ -= [36,-1,1]", "G_{36}^ +=
       [36,1,1]", "S_4 x C_2 = [48,-1,1]", "A_5 = PSL_2(5) = [60,1,1]",
       "G_{72} = [72,-1,1]", "S_5 = PGL_2(5) = [120,-1,1]", "A_6 = [360,1,1]",
       "S_6 = [720,-1,1]".

       In degree 7: "C_7 = [7,1,1]", "D_7 = [14,-1,1]", "M_{21} = [21,1,1]",
       "M_{42} = [42,-1,1]", "PSL_2(7) = PSL_3(2) = [168,1,1]", "A_7 =
       [2520,1,1]", "S_7 = [5040,-1,1]".

       The method used is that of resolvent polynomials and is sensitive to
       the current precision. The precision is updated internally but, in very
       rare cases, a wrong result may be returned if the initial precision was
       not sufficient.

       The library syntax is galois"(x,"prec")".

       polred"(x,{"flag" = 0},{p})"

       finds polynomials with reasonably small coefficients defining subfields
       of the number field defined by "x".  One of the polynomials always
       defines Q (hence is equal to "x-1"), and another always defines the
       same number field as "x" if "x" is irreducible.	All "x" accepted by
       "nfinit" are also allowed here (e.g. non-monic polynomials, "nf",
       "bnf", "[x,Z_K_basis]").

       The following binary digits of flag are significant:

       1: does a partial reduction only. This means that only a suborder of
       the maximal order may be used.

       2: gives also elements. The result is a two-column matrix, the first
       column giving the elements defining these subfields, the second giving
       the corresponding minimal polynomials.

       If "p" is given, it is assumed that it is the two-column matrix of the
       factorization of the discriminant of the polynomial "x".

       The library syntax is polred0"(x,"flag",p,"prec")", where an omitted
       "p" is coded by "gzero". Also available are polred"(x,"prec")" and fac-
       toredpolred"(x,p,"prec")", both corresponding to flag" = 0".

       polredabs"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       finds one of the polynomial defining the same number field as the one
       defined by "x", and such that the sum of the squares of the modulus of
       the roots (i.e. the "T_2"-norm) is minimal.  All "x" accepted by
       "nfinit" are also allowed here (e.g. non-monic polynomials, "nf",
       "bnf", "[x,Z_K_basis]").

       The binary digits of flag mean

       1: outputs a two-component row vector "[P,a]", where "P" is the default
       output and "a" is an element expressed on a root of the polynomial "P",
       whose minimal polynomial is equal to "x".

       4: gives all polynomials of minimal "T_2" norm (of the two polynomials
       P(x) and "P(-x)", only one is given).

       The library syntax is polredabs0"(x,"flag","prec")".

       polredord"(x)"

       finds polynomials with reasonably small coefficients and of the same
       degree as that of "x" defining suborders of the order defined by "x".
       One of the polynomials always defines Q (hence is equal to "(x-1)^n",
       where "n" is the degree), and another always defines the same order as
       "x" if "x" is irreducible.

       The library syntax is ordred"(x)".

       poltschirnhaus"(x)"

       applies a random Tschirnhausen transformation to the polynomial "x",
       which is assumed to be non-constant and separable, so as to obtain a
       new equation for the etale algebra defined by "x". This is for instance
       useful when computing resolvents, hence is used by the "polgalois"
       function.

       The library syntax is tschirnhaus"(x)".

       rnfalgtobasis"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an element of "L" expressed as a polynomial or
       polmod with polmod coefficients, expresses "x" on the relative integral
       basis.

       The library syntax is rnfalgtobasis"("rnf",x)".

       rnfbasis"("bnf",x)"

       given a big number field bnf as output by "bnfinit", and either a poly-
       nomial "x" with coefficients in bnf defining a relative extension "L"
       of bnf, or a pseudo-basis "x" of such an extension, gives either a true
       bnf-basis of "L" if it exists, or an "n+1"-element generating set of
       "L" if not, where "n" is the rank of "L" over bnf.

       The library syntax is rnfbasis"("bnf",x)".

       rnfbasistoalg"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an element of "L" expressed on the relative
       integral basis, computes the representation of "x" as a polmod with
       polmods coefficients.

       The library syntax is rnfbasistoalg"("rnf",x)".

       rnfcharpoly"("nf",T,a,{v = x})"

       characteristic polynomial of "a" over nf, where "a" belongs to the
       algebra defined by "T" over nf, i.e. nf"[X]/(T)". Returns a polynomial
       in variable "v" ("x" by default).

       The library syntax is rnfcharpoly"("nf",T,a,v)", where "v" is a vari-
       able number.

       rnfconductor"("bnf","pol")"

       bnf being a big number field as output by "bnfinit", and pol a relative
       polynomial defining an Abelian extension, computes the class field the-
       ory conductor of this Abelian extension. The result is a 3-component
       vector "["conductor","rayclgp","subgroup"]", where conductor is the
       conductor of the extension given as a 2-component row vector "[f_0,f_
       oo ]", rayclgp is the full ray class group corresponding to the conduc-
       tor given as a 3-component vector [h,cyc,gen] as usual for a group, and
       subgroup is a matrix in HNF defining the subgroup of the ray class
       group on the given generators gen.

       The library syntax is rnfconductor"("rnf","pol","prec")".

       rnfdedekind"("nf","pol","pr")"

       given a number field nf as output by "nfinit" and a polynomial pol with
       coefficients in nf defining a relative extension "L" of nf, evaluates
       the relative Dedekind criterion over the order defined by a root of pol
       for the prime ideal pr and outputs a 3-component vector as the result.
       The first component is a flag equal to 1 if the enlarged order could be
       proven to be pr-maximal and to 0 otherwise (it may be maximal in the
       latter case if pr is ramified in "L"), the second component is a
       pseudo-basis of the enlarged order and the third component is the valu-
       ation at pr of the order discriminant.

       The library syntax is rnfdedekind"("nf","pol","pr")".

       rnfdet"("nf",M)"

       given a pseudomatrix "M" over the maximal order of nf, computes its
       pseudodeterminant.

       The library syntax is rnfdet"("nf",M)".

       rnfdisc"("nf","pol")"

       given a number field nf as output by "nfinit" and a polynomial pol with
       coefficients in nf defining a relative extension "L" of nf, computes
       the relative discriminant of "L". This is a two-element row vector
       "[D,d]", where "D" is the relative ideal discriminant and "d" is the
       relative discriminant considered as an element of nf"^*/{"nf"^*}^2".
       The main variable of nf must be of lower priority than that of pol.

       Note: As usual, nf can be a bnf as output by "nfinit".

       The library syntax is rnfdiscf"("bnf","pol")".

       rnfeltabstorel"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an element of "L" expressed as a polynomial
       modulo the absolute equation rnf"[11][1]", computes "x" as an element
       of the relative extension "L/K" as a polmod with polmod coefficients.

       The library syntax is rnfelementabstorel"("rnf",x)".

       rnfeltdown"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an element of "L" expressed as a polynomial or
       polmod with polmod coefficients, computes "x" as an element of "K" as a
       polmod, assuming "x" is in "K" (otherwise an error will occur). If "x"
       is given on the relative integral basis, apply "rnfbasistoalg" first,
       otherwise PARI will believe you are dealing with a vector.

       The library syntax is rnfelementdown"("rnf",x)".

       rnfeltreltoabs"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an element of "L" expressed as a polynomial or
       polmod with polmod coefficients, computes "x" as an element of the
       absolute extension "L/"Q as a polynomial modulo the absolute equation
       rnf"[11][1]". If "x" is given on the relative integral basis, apply
       "rnfbasistoalg" first, otherwise PARI will believe you are dealing with
       a vector.

       The library syntax is rnfelementreltoabs"("rnf",x)".

       rnfeltup"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an element of "K" expressed as a polynomial or
       polmod, computes "x" as an element of the absolute extension "L/"Q as a
       polynomial modulo the absolute equation rnf"[11][1]". Note that it is
       unnecessary to compute "x" as an element of the relative extension
       "L/K" (its expression would be identical to itself). If "x" is given on
       the integral basis of "K", apply "nfbasistoalg" first, otherwise PARI
       will believe you are dealing with a vector.

       The library syntax is rnfelementup"("rnf",x)".

       rnfequation"("nf","pol",{"flag" = 0})"

       given a number field nf as output by "nfinit" (or simply a polynomial)
       and a polynomial pol with coefficients in nf defining a relative exten-
       sion "L" of nf, computes the absolute equation of "L" over Q.

       If flag is non-zero, outputs a 3-component row vector "[z,a,k]", where
       "z" is the absolute equation of "L" over Q, as in the default behav-
       iour, "a" expresses as an element of "L" a root alpha of the polynomial
       defining the base field nf, and "k" is a small integer such that theta"
       = "beta"+k"alpha where theta is a root of "z" and beta a root of pol.

       The main variable of nf must be of lower priority than that of pol.
       Note that for efficiency, this does not check whether the relative
       equation is irreducible over nf, but only if it is squarefree. If it is
       reducible but squarefree, the result will be the absolute equation of
       the etale algebra defined by pol. If pol is not squarefree, an error
       message will be issued.

       The library syntax is rnfequation0"("nf","pol","flag")".

       rnfhnfbasis"("bnf",x)"

       given a big number field bnf as output by "bnfinit", and either a poly-
       nomial "x" with coefficients in bnf defining a relative extension "L"
       of bnf, or a pseudo-basis "x" of such an extension, gives either a true
       bnf-basis of "L" in upper triangular Hermite normal form, if it exists,
       zero otherwise.

       The library syntax is rnfhermitebasis"("nf",x)".

       rnfidealabstorel"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an ideal of the absolute extension "L/"Q given
       in HNF (if it is not, apply "idealhnf" first), computes the relative
       pseudomatrix in HNF giving the ideal "x" considered as an ideal of the
       relative extension "L/K".

       The library syntax is rnfidealabstorel"("rnf",x)".

       rnfidealdown"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an ideal of the absolute extension "L/"Q given
       in HNF (if it is not, apply "idealhnf" first), gives the ideal of "K"
       below "x", i.e. the intersection of "x" with "K". Note that, if "x" is
       given as a relative ideal (i.e. a pseudomatrix in HNF), then it is not
       necessary to use this function since the result is simply the first
       ideal of the ideal list of the pseudomatrix.

       The library syntax is rnfidealdown"("rnf",x)".

       rnfidealhnf"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being a relative ideal (which can be, as in the abso-
       lute case, of many different types, including of course elements), com-
       putes as a 2-component row vector the relative Hermite normal form of
       "x", the first component being the HNF matrix (with entries on the
       integral basis), and the second component the ideals.

       The library syntax is rnfidealhermite"("rnf",x)".

       rnfidealmul"("rnf",x,y)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" and "y" being ideals of the relative extension "L/K"
       given by pseudo-matrices, outputs the ideal product, again as a rela-
       tive ideal.

       The library syntax is rnfidealmul"("rnf",x,y)".

       rnfidealnormabs"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being a relative ideal (which can be, as in the abso-
       lute case, of many different types, including of course elements), com-
       putes the norm of the ideal "x" considered as an ideal of the absolute
       extension "L/"Q. This is identical to "idealnorm(rnfidealnorm-
       rel("rnf",x))", only faster.

       The library syntax is rnfidealnormabs"("rnf",x)".

       rnfidealnormrel"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being a relative ideal (which can be, as in the abso-
       lute case, of many different types, including of course elements), com-
       putes the relative norm of "x" as a ideal of "K" in HNF.

       The library syntax is rnfidealnormrel"("rnf",x)".

       rnfidealreltoabs"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being a relative ideal (which can be, as in the abso-
       lute case, of many different types, including of course elements), com-
       putes the HNF matrix of the ideal "x" considered as an ideal of the
       absolute extension "L/"Q.

       The library syntax is rnfidealreltoabs"("rnf",x)".

       rnfidealtwoelt"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an ideal of the relative extension "L/K" given
       by a pseudo-matrix, gives a vector of two generators of "x" over Z"_L"
       expressed as polmods with polmod coefficients.

       The library syntax is rnfidealtwoelement"("rnf",x)".

       rnfidealup"("rnf",x)"

       rnf being a relative number field extension "L/K" as output by
       "rnfinit" and "x" being an ideal of "K", gives the ideal "x"Z"_L" as an
       absolute ideal of "L/"Q (the relative ideal representation is trivial:
       the matrix is the identity matrix, and the ideal list starts with "x",
       all the other ideals being Z"_K").

       The library syntax is rnfidealup"("rnf",x)".

       rnfinit"("nf","pol")"

       nf being a number field in "nfinit" format considered as base field,
       and pol a polynomial defining a relative extension over nf, this com-
       putes all the necessary data to work in the relative extension. The
       main variable of pol must be of higher priority (i.e. lower number)
       than that of nf, and the coefficients of pol must be in nf.

       The result is an 11-component row vector as follows (most of the compo-
       nents are technical), the numbering being very close to that of
       "nfinit". In the following description, we let "K" be the base field
       defined by nf, "m" the degree of the base field, "n" the relative
       degree, "L" the large field (of relative degree "n" or absolute degree
       "nm"), "r_1" and "r_2" the number of real and complex places of "K".

       rnf"[1]" contains the relative polynomial pol.

       rnf"[2]" is a row vector with "r_1+r_2" entries, entry "j" being a
       2-component row vector "[r_{j,1},r_{j,2}]" where "r_{j,1}" and
       "r_{j,2}" are the number of real and complex places of "L" above the
       "j"-th place of "K" so that "r_{j,1} = 0" and "r_{j,2} = n" if "j" is a
       complex place, while if "j" is a real place we have "r_{j,1}+2r_{j,2} =
       n".

       rnf"[3]" is a two-component row vector "["d"(L/K),s]" where d"(L/K)" is
       the relative ideal discriminant of "L/K" and "s" is the discriminant of
       "L/K" viewed as an element of "K^*/(K^*)^2", in other words it is the
       output of "rnfdisc".

       rnf"[4]" is the ideal index f, i.e. such that "d(pol)"Z"_K =
       "f"^2"d"(L/K)".

       rnf"[5]" is a vector vm with 7 entries useful for certain computations
       in the relative extension "L/K". vm"[1]" is a vector of "r_1+r_2"
       matrices, the "j"-th matrix being an "(r_{1,j}+r_{2,j}) x n" matrix
       "M_j" representing the numerical values of the conjugates of the "j"-th
       embedding of the elements of the integral basis, where "r_{i,j}" is as
       in rnf"[2]". vm"[2]" is a vector of "r_1+r_2" matrices, the "j"-th
       matrix "MC_j" being essentially the conjugate of the matrix "M_j"
       except that the last "r_{2,j}" columns are also multiplied by 2.
       vm"[3]" is a vector of "r_1+r_2" matrices "T2_j", where "T2_j" is an "n
       x n" matrix equal to the real part of the product "MC_j.M_j" (which is
       a real positive definite matrix). vm"[4]" is the "n x n" matrix "T"
       whose entries are the relative traces of omega"_i"omega"_j" expressed
       as polmods in nf, where the omega"_i" are the elements of the relative
       integral basis. Note that the "j"-th embedding of "T" is equal to
       "\overline{MC_j}.M_j", and in particular will be equal to "T2_j" if
       "r_{2,j} = 0". Note also that the relative ideal discriminant of "L/K"
       is equal to  det "(T)" times the square of the product of the ideals in
       the relative pseudo-basis (in rnf"[7][2]"). The last 3 entries vm"[5]",
       vm"[6]" and vm"[7]" are linked to the different as in "nfinit", but
       have not yet been implemented.

       rnf"[6]" is a row vector with "r_1+r_2" entries, the "j"-th entry being
       the row vector with "r_{1,j}+r_{2,j}" entries of the roots of the
       "j"-th embedding of the relative polynomial pol.

       rnf"[7]" is a two-component row vector, where the first component is
       the relative integral pseudo basis expressed as polynomials (in the
       variable of "pol") with polmod coefficients in nf, and the second com-
       ponent is the ideal list of the pseudobasis in HNF.

       rnf"[8]" is the inverse matrix of the integral basis matrix, with coef-
       ficients polmods in nf.

       rnf"[9]" may be the multiplication table of the integral basis, but is
       not implemented at present.

       rnf"[10]" is nf.

       rnf"[11]" is a vector vabs with 5 entries describing the absolute
       extension "L/"Q. vabs"[1]" is an absolute equation.  vabs"[2]"
       expresses the generator alpha of the number field nf as a polynomial
       modulo the absolute equation vabs"[1]".	vabs"[3]" is a small integer
       "k" such that, if beta is an abstract root of pol and alpha the genera-
       tor of nf, the generator whose root is vabs will be beta" + k "alpha.
       Note that one must be very careful if "k ! = 0" when dealing simultane-
       ously with absolute and relative quantities since the generator chosen
       for the absolute extension is not the same as for the relative one. If
       this happens, one can of course go on working, but we strongly advise
       to change the relative polynomial so that its root will be beta" + k
       "alpha. Typically, the GP instruction would be

       "pol = subst(pol, x, x - k*Mod(y,"nf".pol))"

       Finally, vabs"[4]" is the absolute integral basis of "L" expressed in
       HNF (hence as would be output by "nfinit(vabs[1])"), and vabs"[5]" the
       inverse matrix of the integral basis, allowing to go from polmod to
       integral basis representation.

       The library syntax is rnfinitalg"("nf","pol","prec")".

       rnfisfree"("bnf",x)"

       given a big number field bnf as output by "bnfinit", and either a poly-
       nomial "x" with coefficients in bnf defining a relative extension "L"
       of bnf, or a pseudo-basis "x" of such an extension, returns true (1) if
       "L/"bnf is free, false (0) if not.

       The library syntax is rnfisfree"("bnf",x)", and the result is a "long".

       rnfisnorm"("bnf","ext","el",{"flag" = 1})"

       similar to "bnfisnorm" but in the relative case. This tries to decide
       whether the element el in bnf is the norm of some "y" in ext.  bnf is
       as output by "bnfinit".

       ext is a relative extension which has to be a row vector whose compo-
       nents are:

       ext"[1]": a relative equation of the number field ext over bnf. As
       usual, the priority of the variable of the polynomial defining the
       ground field bnf (say "y") must be lower than the main variable of
       ext"[1]", say "x".

       ext"[2]": the generator "y" of the base field as a polynomial in "x"
       (as given by "rnfequation" with flag" = 1").

       ext"[3]": is the "bnfinit" of the absolute extension ext"/"Q.

       This returns a vector "[a,b]", where el" = "Norm"(a)*b". It looks for a
       solution which is an "S"-integer, with "S" a list of places (of bnf)
       containing the ramified primes, the generators of the class group of
       ext, as well as those primes dividing el. If ext"/"bnf is known to be
       Galois, set flag" = 0" (here el is a norm iff "b = 1").	If flag is non
       zero add to "S" all the places above the primes which: divide flag if
       flag" < 0", or are less than flag if flag" > 0". The answer is guaran-
       teed (i.e. el is a norm iff "b = 1") under GRH, if "S" contains all
       primes less than 12 log "^2|disc("Ext")|", where Ext is the normal clo-
       sure of ext" / "bnf. Example:

	 bnf = bnfinit(y^3 + y^2 - 2*y - 1);
	 p = x^2 + Mod(y^2 + 2*y + 1, bnf.pol);
	 rnf = rnfequation(bnf,p,1);
	 ext = [p, rnf[2], bnfinit(rnf[1])];
	 rnfisnorm(bnf,ext,17, 1)

       checks whether 17 is a norm in the Galois extension Q"("beta") /
       "Q"("alpha")", where alpha"^3 + "alpha"^2 - 2"alpha" - 1 = 0" and
       beta"^2 + "alpha"^2 + 2*"alpha" + 1 = 0" (it is).

       The library syntax is rnfisnorm"("bnf",ext,x,"flag","prec")".

       rnfkummer"("bnr","subgroup",{deg = 0})"

       bnr being as output by "bnrinit", finds a relative equation for the
       class field corresponding to the module in bnr and the given congruence
       subgroup. If deg is positive, outputs the list of all relative equa-
       tions of degree deg contained in the ray class field defined by bnr.

       (THIS PROGRAM IS STILL IN DEVELOPMENT STAGE)

       The library syntax is rnfkummer"("bnr","subgroup","deg","prec")", where
       deg is a "long".

       rnflllgram"("nf","pol","order")"

       given a polynomial pol with coefficients in nf and an order order as
       output by "rnfpseudobasis" or similar, gives "[["neworder"],U]", where
       neworder is a reduced order and "U" is the unimodular transformation
       matrix.

       The library syntax is rnflllgram"("nf","pol","order","prec")".

       rnfnormgroup"("bnr","pol")"

       bnr being a big ray class field as output by "bnrinit" and pol a rela-
       tive polynomial defining an Abelian extension, computes the norm group
       (alias Artin or Takagi group) corresponding to the Abelian extension of
       bnf" = bnr[1]" defined by pol, where the module corresponding to bnr is
       assumed to be a multiple of the conductor (i.e. polrel defines a subex-
       tension of bnr). The result is the HNF defining the norm group on the
       given generators of bnr"[5][3]". Note that neither the fact that pol
       defines an Abelian extension nor the fact that the module is a multiple
       of the conductor is checked. The result is undefined if the assumption
       is not correct.

       The library syntax is rnfnormgroup"("bnr","pol")".

       rnfpolred"("nf","pol")"

       relative version of "polred".  Given a monic polynomial pol with coef-
       ficients in nf, finds a list of relative polynomials defining some sub-
       fields, hopefully simpler and containing the original field. In the
       present version 2.2.0, this is slower than "rnfpolredabs".

       The library syntax is rnfpolred"("nf","pol","prec")".

       rnfpolredabs"("nf","pol",{"flag" = 0})"

       relative version of "polredabs". Given a monic polynomial pol with
       coefficients in nf, finds a simpler relative polynomial defining the
       same field. If flag" = 1", returns "[P,a]" where "P" is the default
       output and "a" is an element expressed on a root of "P" whose charac-
       teristic polynomial is pol, if flag" = 2", returns an absolute polyno-
       mial (same as

       "rnfequation("nf",rnfpolredabs("nf","pol"))"

       but faster).

       Remark. In the present implementation, this is both faster and much
       more efficient than "rnfpolred", the difference being more dramatic
       than in the absolute case. This is because the implementation of "rnf-
       polred" is based on (a partial implementation of) an incomplete reduc-
       tion theory of lattices over number fields (i.e. the function "rnflll-
       gram") which deserves to be improved.

       The library syntax is rnfpolredabs"("nf","pol","flag","prec")".

       rnfpseudobasis"("nf","pol")"

       given a number field nf as output by "nfinit" and a polynomial pol with
       coefficients in nf defining a relative extension "L" of nf, computes a
       pseudo-basis "(A,I)" and the relative discriminant of "L".  This is
       output as a four-element row vector "[A,I,D,d]", where "D" is the rela-
       tive ideal discriminant and "d" is the relative discriminant considered
       as an element of nf"^*/{"nf"^*}^2".

       Note: As usual, nf can be a bnf as output by "bnfinit".

       The library syntax is rnfpseudobasis"("nf","pol")".

       rnfsteinitz"("nf",x)"

       given a number field nf as output by "nfinit" and either a polynomial
       "x" with coefficients in nf defining a relative extension "L" of nf, or
       a pseudo-basis "x" of such an extension as output for example by "rnf-
       pseudobasis", computes another pseudo-basis "(A,I)" (not in HNF in gen-
       eral) such that all the ideals of "I" except perhaps the last one are
       equal to the ring of integers of nf, and outputs the four-component row
       vector "[A,I,D,d]" as in "rnfpseudobasis". The name of this function
       comes from the fact that the ideal class of the last ideal of "I"
       (which is well defined) is called the Steinitz class of the module
       Z"_L".

       Note: nf can be a bnf as output by "bnfinit".

       The library syntax is rnfsteinitz"("nf",x)".

       subgrouplist"("bnr",{"bound"},{"flag" = 0})"

       bnr being as output by "bnrinit" or a list of cyclic components of a
       finite Abelian group "G", outputs the list of subgroups of "G" (of
       index bounded by bound, if not omitted). Subgroups are given as HNF
       left divisors of the SNF matrix corresponding to "G". If flag" = 0"
       (default) and bnr is as output by "bnrinit", gives only the subgroups
       whose modulus is the conductor.

       The library syntax is subgrouplist0"("bnr","bound","flag","prec")",
       where bound, flag and prec are long integers.

       zetak"("znf",x,{"flag" = 0})"

       znf being a number field initialized by "zetakinit" (not by "nfinit"),
       computes the value of the Dedekind zeta function of the number field at
       the complex number "x". If flag" = 1" computes Dedekind Lambda function
       instead (i.e. the product of the Dedekind zeta function by its gamma
       and exponential factors).

       The accuracy of the result depends in an essential way on the accuracy
       of both the "zetakinit" program and the current accuracy, but even so
       the result may be off by up to 5 or 10 decimal digits.

       The library syntax is glambdak"("znf",x,"prec")" or gze-
       tak"("znf",x,"prec")".

       zetakinit"(x)"

       computes a number of initialization data concerning the number field
       defined by the polynomial "x" so as to be able to compute the Dedekind
       zeta and lambda functions (respectively zetak(x) and "zetak(x,1)").
       This function calls in particular the "bnfinit" program. The result is
       a 9-component vector "v" whose components are very technical and cannot
       really be used by the user except through the "zetak" function. The
       only component which can be used if it has not been computed already is
       "v[1][4]" which is the result of the "bnfinit" call.

       This function is very inefficient and should be rewritten. It needs to
       computes millions of coefficients of the corresponding Dirichlet series
       if the precision is big. Unless the discriminant is small it will not
       be able to handle more than 9 digits of relative precision
       (e.g "zetakinit(x^8 - 2)" needs 440MB of memory at default precision).

       The library syntax is initzeta"(x)".

Polynomials and power series
       We group here all functions which are specific to polynomials or power
       series. Many other functions which can be applied on these objects are
       described in the other sections. Also, some of the functions described
       here can be applied to other types.

       O"(a""^""b)"

       "p"-adic (if "a" is an integer greater or equal to 2) or power series
       zero (in all other cases), with precision given by "b".

       The library syntax is ggrandocp"(a,b)", where "b" is a "long".

       deriv"(x,{v})"

       derivative of "x" with respect to the main variable if "v" is omitted,
       and with respect to "v" otherwise. "x" can be any type except polmod.
       The derivative of a scalar type is zero, and the derivative of a vector
       or matrix is done componentwise. One can use "x'" as a shortcut if the
       derivative is with respect to the main variable of "x".

       The library syntax is deriv"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long", and an omit-
       ted "v" is coded as "-1".

       eval"(x)"

       replaces in "x" the formal variables by the values that have been
       assigned to them after the creation of "x". This is mainly useful in
       GP, and not in library mode. Do not confuse this with substitution (see
       "subst"). Applying this function to a character string yields the out-
       put from the corresponding GP command, as if directly input from the
       keyboard (see "Label se:strings").

       The library syntax is geval"(x)". The more basic functions pole-
       val"(q,x)", qfeval"(q,x)", and hqfeval"(q,x)" evaluate "q" at "x",
       where "q" is respectively assumed to be a polynomial, a quadratic form
       (a symmetric matrix), or an Hermitian form (an Hermitian complex
       matrix).

       factorpadic"("pol",p,r,{"flag" = 0})"

       "p"-adic factorization of the polynomial pol to precision "r", the
       result being a two-column matrix as in "factor". The factors are nor-
       malized so that their leading coefficient is a power of "p". "r" must
       be strictly larger than the "p"-adic valuation of the discriminant of
       pol for the result to make any sense. The method used is a modified
       version of the round 4 algorithm of Zassenhaus.

       If flag" = 1", use an algorithm due to Buchmann and Lenstra, which is
       usually less efficient.

       The library syntax is factorpadic4"("pol",p,r)", where "r" is a "long"
       integer.

       intformal"(x,{v})"

       formal integration of "x" with respect to the main variable if "v" is
       omitted, with respect to the variable "v" otherwise. Since PARI does
       not know about ``abstract'' logarithms (they are immediately evaluated,
       if only to a power series), logarithmic terms in the result will yield
       an error. "x" can be of any type. When "x" is a rational function, it
       is assumed that the base ring is an integral domain of characteristic
       zero.

       The library syntax is integ"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an omit-
       ted "v" is coded as "-1".

       padicappr"("pol",a)"

       vector of "p"-adic roots of the polynomial "pol" congruent to the
       "p"-adic number "a" modulo "p" (or modulo 4 if "p = 2"), and with the
       same "p"-adic precision as "a". The number "a" can be an ordinary
       "p"-adic number (type "t_PADIC", i.e. an element of Q"_p") or can be an
       element of a finite extension of Q"_p", in which case it is of type
       "t_POLMOD", where at least one of the coefficients of the polmod is a
       "p"-adic number. In this case, the result is the vector of roots
       belonging to the same extension of Q"_p" as "a".

       The library syntax is apprgen9"("pol",a)", but if "a" is known to be
       simply a "p"-adic number (type "t_PADIC"), the syntax
       apprgen"("pol",a)" can be used.

       polcoeff"(x,s,{v})"

       coefficient of degree "s" of the polynomial "x", with respect to the
       main variable if "v" is omitted, with respect to "v" otherwise.

       The library syntax is polcoeff0"(x,s,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an
       omitted "v" is coded as "-1". Also available is truecoeff"(x,v)".

       poldegree"(x,{v})"

       degree of the polynomial "x" in the main variable if "v" is omitted, in
       the variable "v" otherwise. This is to be understood as follows. When
       "x" is a polynomial or a rational function, it gives the degree of "x",
       the degree of 0 being "-1" by convention. When "x" is a non-zero
       scalar, it gives 0, and when "x" is a zero scalar, it gives "-1".
       Return an error otherwise.

       The library syntax is poldegree"(x,v)", where "v" and the result are
       "long"s (and an omitted "v" is coded as "-1"). Also available is
       degree"(x)", which is equivalent to "poldegree(x,-1)".

       polcyclo"(n,{v = x})"

       "n"-th cyclotomic polynomial, in variable "v" ("x" by default). The
       integer "n" must be positive.

       The library syntax is cyclo"(n,v)", where "n" and "v" are "long" inte-
       gers ("v" is a variable number, usually obtained through "varn").

       poldisc"("pol",{v})"

       discriminant of the polynomial pol in the main variable is "v" is omit-
       ted, in "v" otherwise. The algorithm used is the subresultant algo-
       rithm.

       The library syntax is poldisc0"(x,v)". Also available is discsr"(x)",
       equivalent to "poldisc0(x,-1)".

       poldiscreduced"(f)"

       reduced discriminant vector of the (integral, monic) polynomial "f".
       This is the vector of elementary divisors of
       Z"["alpha"]/f'("alpha")"Z"["alpha"]", where alpha is a root of the
       polynomial "f". The components of the result are all positive, and
       their product is equal to the absolute value of the discriminant
       of "f".

       The library syntax is reduceddiscsmith"(x)".

       polhensellift"(x, y, p, e)"

       given a vector "y" of polynomials that are pairwise relatively prime
       modulo the prime "p", and whose product is congruent to "x" modulo "p",
       lift the elements of "y" to polynomials whose product is congruent to
       "x" modulo "p^e".

       The library syntax is polhensellift"(x,y,p,e)" where "e" must be a
       "long".

       polinterpolate"(xa,{ya},{v = x},{&e})"

       given the data vectors "xa" and "ya" of the same length "n" ("xa" con-
       taining the "x"-coordinates, and "ya" the corresponding "y"-coordi-
       nates), this function finds the interpolating polynomial passing
       through these points and evaluates it at "v". If "ya" is omitted,
       return the polynomial interpolating the "(i,xa[i])". If present, "e"
       will contain an error estimate on the returned value.

       The library syntax is polint"(xa,ya,v,&e)", where "e" will contain an
       error estimate on the returned value.

       polisirreducible"("pol")"

       pol being a polynomial (univariate in the present version 2.2.0),
       returns 1 if pol is non-constant and irreducible, 0 otherwise. Irre-
       ducibility is checked over the smallest base field over which pol seems
       to be defined.

       The library syntax is gisirreducible"("pol")".

       pollead"(x,{v})"

       leading coefficient of the polynomial or power series "x". This is com-
       puted with respect to the main variable of "x" if "v" is omitted, with
       respect to the variable "v" otherwise.

       The library syntax is pollead"(x,v)", where "v" is a "long" and an
       omitted "v" is coded as "-1". Also available is leadingcoeff"(x)".

       pollegendre"(n,{v = x})"

       creates the "n^{th}" Legendre polynomial, in variable "v".

       The library syntax is legendre"(n)", where "x" is a "long".

       polrecip"("pol")"

       reciprocal polynomial of pol, i.e. the coefficients are in reverse
       order. pol must be a polynomial.

       The library syntax is polrecip"(x)".

       polresultant"(x,y,{v},{"flag" = 0})"

       resultant of the two polynomials "x" and "y" with exact entries, with
       respect to the main variables of "x" and "y" if "v" is omitted, with
       respect to the variable "v" otherwise. The algorithm used is the subre-
       sultant algorithm by default.

       If flag" = 1", uses the determinant of Sylvester's matrix instead (here
       "x" and "y" may have non-exact coefficients).

       If flag" = 2", uses Ducos's modified subresultant algorithm. It should
       be much faster than the default if the coefficient ring is complicated
       (e.g multivariate polynomials or huge coefficients), and slightly
       slower otherwise.

       The library syntax is polresultant0"(x,y,v,"flag")", where "v" is a
       "long" and an omitted "v" is coded as "-1". Also available are sub-
       res"(x,y)" (flag" = 0") and resultant2"(x,y)" (flag" = 1").

       polroots"("pol",{"flag" = 0})"

       complex roots of the polynomial pol, given as a column vector where
       each root is repeated according to its multiplicity. The precision is
       given as for transcendental functions: under GP it is kept in the vari-
       able "realprecision" and is transparent to the user, but it must be
       explicitly given as a second argument in library mode.

       The algorithm used is a modification of A. Schoenhage's remarkable
       root-finding algorithm, due to and implemented by X. Gourdon. Barring
       bugs, it is guaranteed to converge and to give the roots to the
       required accuracy.

       If flag" = 1", use a variant of the Newton-Raphson method, which is not
       guaranteed to converge, but is rather fast. If you get the messages
       ``too many iterations in roots'' or ``INTERNAL ERROR: incorrect result
       in roots'', use the default function (i.e. no flag or flag" = 0"). This
       used to be the default root-finding function in PARI until version
       1.39.06.

       The library syntax is roots"("pol","prec")" or root-
       sold"("pol","prec")".

       polrootsmod"("pol",p,{"flag" = 0})"

       row vector of roots modulo "p" of the polynomial pol. The particular
       non-prime value "p = 4" is accepted, mainly for 2-adic computations.
       Multiple roots are not repeated.

       If "p < 100", you may try setting flag" = 1", which uses a naive
       search. In this case, multiple roots are repeated with their order of
       multiplicity.

       The library syntax is rootmod"("pol",p)" (flag" = 0") or root-
       mod2"("pol",p)" (flag" = 1").

       polrootspadic"("pol",p,r)"

       row vector of "p"-adic roots of the polynomial pol with "p"-adic preci-
       sion equal to "r". Multiple roots are not repeated. "p" is assumed to
       be a prime.

       The library syntax is rootpadic"("pol",p,r)", where "r" is a "long".

       polsturm"("pol",{a},{b})"

       number of real roots of the real polynomial pol in the interval
       "]a,b]", using Sturm's algorithm. "a" (resp. "b") is taken to be "- oo
       " (resp. "+ oo ") if omitted.

       The library syntax is sturmpart"("pol",a,b)". Use "NULL" to omit an
       argument.  sturm"("pol")" is equivalent to sturm-
       part"("pol",NULL,NULL)". The result is a "long".

       polsubcyclo"(n,d,{v = x})"

       gives a polynomial (in variable "v") defining the sub-Abelian extension
       of degree "d" of the cyclotomic field Q"("zeta"_n)", where "d |
       "phi"(n)". "("Z"/n"Z")^*" has to be cyclic (i.e. "n = 2", 4, "p^k" or
       "2p^k" for an odd prime "p"). The function "galoissubcyclo" covers the
       general case.

       The library syntax is subcyclo"(n,d,v)", where "v" is a variable num-
       ber.

       polsylvestermatrix"(x,y)"

       forms the Sylvester matrix corresponding to the two polynomials "x" and
       "y", where the coefficients of the polynomials are put in the columns
       of the matrix (which is the natural direction for solving equations
       afterwards). The use of this matrix can be essential when dealing with
       polynomials with inexact entries, since polynomial Euclidean division
       doesn't make much sense in this case.

       The library syntax is sylvestermatrix"(x,y)".

       polsym"(x,n)"

       creates the vector of the symmetric powers of the roots of the polyno-
       mial "x" up to power "n", using Newton's formula.

       The library syntax is polsym"(x)".

       poltchebi"(n,{v = x})"

       creates the "n^{th}" Chebyshev polynomial, in variable "v".

       The library syntax is tchebi"(n,v)", where "n" and "v" are "long" inte-
       gers ("v" is a variable number).

       polzagier"(n,m)"

       creates Zagier's polynomial "P_{n,m}" used in the functions "sumalt"
       and "sumpos" (with flag" = 1"). The exact definition can be found in a
       forthcoming paper. One must have "m <= n".

       The library syntax is polzagreel"(n,m,"prec")" if the result is only
       wanted as a polynomial with real coefficients to the precision prec, or
       polzag"(n,m)" if the result is wanted exactly, where "n" and "m" are
       "long"s.

       serconvol"(x,y)"

       convolution (or Hadamard product) of the two power series "x" and "y";
       in other words if "x = "sum" a_k*X^k" and "y = "sum" b_k*X^k" then
       "serconvol(x,y) = "sum" a_k*b_k*X^k".

       The library syntax is convol"(x,y)".

       serlaplace"(x)"

       "x" must be a power series with only non-negative exponents. If "x =
       "sum" (a_k/k!)*X^k" then the result is sum" a_k*X^k".

       The library syntax is laplace"(x)".

       serreverse"(x)"

       reverse power series (i.e. "x^{-1}", not "1/x") of "x". "x" must be a
       power series whose valuation is exactly equal to one.

       The library syntax is recip"(x)".

       subst"(x,y,z)"

       replace the simple variable "y" by the argument "z" in the ``polyno-
       mial'' expression "x". Every type is allowed for "x", but if it is not
       a genuine polynomial (or power series, or rational function), the sub-
       stitution will be done as if the scalar components were polynomials of
       degree one. In particular, beware that:

	 ? subst(1, x, [1,2; 3,4])
	 %1 =
	 [1 0]

	 [0 1]

	 ? subst(1, x, Mat([0,1]))
	   ***	 forbidden substitution by a non square matrix

       If "x" is a power series, "z" must be either a polynomial, a power
       series, or a rational function. "y" must be a simple variable name.

       The library syntax is gsubst"(x,v,z)", where "v" is the number of the
       variable "y".

       taylor"(x,y)"

       Taylor expansion around 0 of "x" with respect to the simple variable
       "y". "x" can be of any reasonable type, for example a rational func-
       tion. The number of terms of the expansion is transparent to the user
       under GP, but must be given as a second argument in library mode.

       The library syntax is tayl"(x,y,n)", where the "long" integer "n" is
       the desired number of terms in the expansion.

       thue"("tnf",a,{"sol"})"

       solves the equation "P(x,y) = a" in integers "x" and "y", where tnf was
       created with thueinit(P). sol, if present, contains the solutions of
       "Norm(x) = a" modulo units of positive norm in the number field defined
       by "P" (as computed by "bnfisintnorm"). If tnf was computed without
       assuming GRH (flag" = 1" in "thueinit"), the result is unconditional.
       For instance, here's how to solve the Thue equation "x^{13} - 5y^{13} =
       - 4":

	 ? tnf = thueinit(x^13 - 5);
	 ? thue(tnf, -4)
	 %1 = [[1, 1]]

       Hence, assuming GRH, the only solution is "x = 1", "y = 1".

       The library syntax is thue"("tnf",a,"sol")", where an omitted sol is
       coded as "NULL".

       thueinit"(P,{"flag" = 0})"

       initializes the tnf corresponding to "P". It is meant to be used in
       conjunction with "thue" to solve Thue equations "P(x,y) = a", where "a"
       is an integer. If flag is non-zero, certify the result unconditionnaly,
       Otherwise, assume GRH, this being much faster of course.

       The library syntax is thueinit"(P,"flag","prec")".

Vectors, matrices, linear algebra and sets
       Note that most linear algebra functions operating on subspaces defined
       by generating sets (such as "mathnf", "qflll", etc.) take matrices as
       arguments. As usual, the generating vectors are taken to be the columns
       of the given matrix.

       algdep"(x,k,{"flag" = 0})"

       "x" being real, complex, or "p"-adic, finds a polynomial of degree at
       most "k" with integer coefficients having "x" as approximate root. Note
       that the polynomial which is obtained is not necessarily the ``cor-
       rect'' one (it's not even guaranteed to be irreducible!). One can check
       the closeness either by a polynomial evaluation or substitution, or by
       computing the roots of the polynomial given by algdep.

       If "x" is padic, flag is meaningless and the algorithm LLL-reduces the
       ``dual lattice'' corresponding to the powers of "x".

       Otherwise, if flag is zero, the algorithm used is a variant of the LLL
       algorithm due to Hastad, Lagarias and Schnorr (STACS 1986). If the pre-
       cision is too low, the routine may enter an infinite loop.

       If flag is non-zero, use a standard LLL. flag then indicates a preci-
       sion, which should be between 0.5 and 1.0 times the number of decimal
       digits to which "x" was computed.

       The library syntax is algdep0"(x,k,"flag","prec")", where "k" and flag
       are "long"s.  Also available is algdep"(x,k,"prec")" (flag" = 0").

       charpoly"(A,{v = x},{"flag" = 0})"

       characteristic polynomial of "A" with respect to the variable "v",
       i.e. determinant of "v*I-A" if "A" is a square matrix, determinant of
       the map ``multiplication by "A"'' if "A" is a scalar, in particular a
       polmod (e.g. "charpoly(I,x) = x^2+1").  Note that in the latter case,
       the minimal polynomial can be obtained as

	 minpoly(A)=
	 {
	   local(y);
	   y = charpoly(A);
	   y / gcd(y,y')
	 }

       The value of flag is only significant for matrices.

       If flag" = 0", the method used is essentially the same as for computing
       the adjoint matrix, i.e. computing the traces of the powers of "A".

       If flag" = 1", uses Lagrange interpolation which is almost always
       slower.

       If flag" = 2", uses the Hessenberg form. This is faster than the
       default when the coefficients are integermod a prime or real numbers,
       but is usually slower in other base rings.

       The library syntax is charpoly0"(A,v,"flag")", where "v" is the vari-
       able number. Also available are the functions caract"(A,v)" (flag" =
       1"), carhess"(A,v)" (flag" = 2"), and caradj"(A,v,"pt")" where, in this
       last case, pt is a "GEN*" which, if not equal to "NULL", will receive
       the address of the adjoint matrix of "A" (see "matadjoint"), so both
       can be obtained at once.

       concat"(x,{y})"

       concatenation of "x" and "y". If "x" or "y" is not a vector or matrix,
       it is considered as a one-dimensional vector. All types are allowed for
       "x" and "y", but the sizes must be compatible. Note that matrices are
       concatenated horizontally, i.e. the number of rows stays the same.
       Using transpositions, it is easy to concatenate them vertically.

       To concatenate vectors sideways (i.e. to obtain a two-row or two-column
       matrix), first transform the vector into a one-row or one-column matrix
       using the function "Mat". Concatenating a row vector to a matrix having
       the same number of columns will add the row to the matrix (top row if
       the vector is "x", i.e. comes first, and bottom row otherwise).

       The empty matrix "[;]" is considered to have a number of rows compati-
       ble with any operation, in particular concatenation. (Note that this is
       definitely not the case for empty vectors "[ ]" or "[ ]~".)

       If "y" is omitted, "x" has to be a row vector or a list, in which case
       its elements are concatenated, from left to right, using the above
       rules.

	 ? concat([1,2], [3,4])
	 %1 = [1, 2, 3, 4]
	 ? a = [[1,2]~, [3,4]~]; concat(a)
	 %2 = [1, 2, 3, 4]~
	 ? a[1] = Mat(a[1]); concat(a)
	 %3 =
	 [1 3]

	 [2 4]

	 ? concat([1,2; 3,4], [5,6]~)
	 %4 =
	 [1 2 5]

	 [3 4 6]
	 ? concat([%, [7,8]~, [1,2,3,4]])
	 %5 =
	 [1 2 5 7]

	 [3 4 6 8]

	 [1 2 3 4]

       The library syntax is concat"(x,y)".

       lindep"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       "x" being a vector with real or complex coefficients, finds a small
       integral linear combination among these coefficients.

       If flag" = 0", uses a variant of the LLL algorithm due to Hastad,
       Lagarias and Schnorr (STACS 1986).

       If flag" > 0", uses the LLL algorithm. flag is a parameter which should
       be between one half the number of decimal digits of precision and that
       number (see "algdep").

       If flag" < 0", returns as soon as one relation has been found.

       The library syntax is lindep0"(x,"flag","prec")". Also available is
       lindep"(x,"prec")" (flag" = 0").

       listcreate"(n)"

       creates an empty list of maximal length "n".

       This function is useless in library mode.

       listinsert"("list",x,n)"

       inserts the object "x" at position "n" in list (which must be of type
       "t_LIST"). All the remaining elements of list (from position "n+1"
       onwards) are shifted to the right. This and "listput" are the only com-
       mands which enable you to increase a list's effective length (as long
       as it remains under the maximal length specified at the time of the
       "listcreate").

       This function is useless in library mode.

       listkill"("list")"

       kill list. This deletes all elements from list and sets its effective
       length to 0. The maximal length is not affected.

       This function is useless in library mode.

       listput"("list",x,{n})"

       sets the "n"-th element of the list list (which must be of type
       "t_LIST") equal to "x". If "n" is omitted, or greater than the list
       current effective length, just appends "x". This and "listinsert" are
       the only commands which enable you to increase a list's effective
       length (as long as it remains under the maximal length specified at the
       time of the "listcreate").

       If you want to put an element into an occupied cell, i.e. if you don't
       want to change the effective length, you can consider the list as a
       vector and use the usual "list[n] = x" construct.

       This function is useless in library mode.

       listsort"("list",{"flag" = 0})"

       sorts list (which must be of type "t_LIST") in place. If flag is
       non-zero, suppresses all repeated coefficients. This is much faster
       than the "vecsort" command since no copy has to be made.

       This function is useless in library mode.

       matadjoint"(x)"

       adjoint matrix of "x", i.e. the matrix "y" of cofactors of "x", satis-
       fying "x*y = " det "(x)*Id". "x" must be a (non-necessarily invertible)
       square matrix.

       The library syntax is adj"(x)".

       matcompanion"(x)"

       the left companion matrix to the polynomial "x".

       The library syntax is assmat"(x)".

       matdet"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       determinant of "x". "x" must be a square matrix.

       If flag" = 0", uses Gauss-Bareiss.

       If flag" = 1", uses classical Gaussian elimination, which is better
       when the entries of the matrix are reals or integers for example, but
       usually much worse for more complicated entries like multivariate poly-
       nomials.

       The library syntax is det"(x)" (flag" = 0") and det2"(x)" (flag" = 1").

       matdetint"(x)"

       "x" being an "m x n" matrix with integer coefficients, this function
       computes a multiple of the determinant of the lattice generated by the
       columns of "x" if it is of rank "m", and returns zero otherwise. This
       function can be useful in conjunction with the function "mathnfmod"
       which needs to know such a multiple. Other ways to obtain this determi-
       nant (assuming the rank is maximal) is "matdet(qflll(x,4)[2]*x)" or
       more simply "matdet(mathnf(x))".	 Experiment to see which is faster for
       your applications.

       The library syntax is detint"(x)".

       matdiagonal"(x)"

       "x" being a vector, creates the diagonal matrix whose diagonal entries
       are those of "x".

       The library syntax is diagonal"(x)".

       mateigen"(x)"

       gives the eigenvectors of "x" as columns of a matrix.

       The library syntax is eigen"(x)".

       mathess"(x)"

       Hessenberg form of the square matrix "x".

       The library syntax is hess"(x)".

       mathilbert"(x)"

       "x" being a "long", creates the Hilbert matrix of order "x", i.e. the
       matrix whose coefficient ("i","j") is "1/ (i+j-1)".

       The library syntax is mathilbert"(x)".

       mathnf"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       if "x" is a (not necessarily square) matrix of maximal rank, finds the
       upper triangular Hermite normal form of "x". If the rank of "x" is
       equal to its number of rows, the result is a square matrix. In general,
       the columns of the result form a basis of the lattice spanned by the
       columns of "x".

       If flag" = 0", uses the naive algorithm. If the Z-module generated by
       the columns is a lattice, it is recommanded to use "mathnfmod(x, mat-
       detint(x))" instead (much faster).

       If flag" = 1", uses Batut's algorithm. Outputs a two-component row vec-
       tor "[H,U]", where "H" is the upper triangular Hermite normal form of
       "x" (i.e. the default result) and "U" is the unimodular transformation
       matrix such that "xU = [0|H]". If the rank of "x" is equal to its num-
       ber of rows, "H" is a square matrix. In general, the columns of "H"
       form a basis of the lattice spanned by the columns of "x".

       If flag" = 2", uses Havas's algorithm. Outputs "[H,U,P]", such that "H"
       and "U" are as before and "P" is a permutation of the rows such that
       "P" applied to "xU" gives "H". This does not work very well in present
       version 2.2.0.

       If flag" = 3", uses Batut's algorithm, and outputs "[H,U,P]" as in the
       previous case.

       If flag" = 4", as in case 1 above, but uses LLL reduction along the
       way.

       The library syntax is mathnf0"(x,"flag")". Also available are hnf"(x)"
       (flag" = 0") and hnfall"(x)" (flag" = 1"). To reduce huge (say "400  x
       400" and more) relation matrices (sparse with small entries), you can
       use the pair "hnfspec" / "hnfadd". Since this is rather technical and
       the calling interface may change, they are not documented yet. Look at
       the code in "basemath/alglin1.c".

       mathnfmod"(x,d)"

       if "x" is a (not necessarily square) matrix of maximal rank with inte-
       ger entries, and "d" is a multiple of the (non-zero) determinant of the
       lattice spanned by the columns of "x", finds the upper triangular Her-
       mite normal form of "x".

       If the rank of "x" is equal to its number of rows, the result is a
       square matrix. In general, the columns of the result form a basis of
       the lattice spanned by the columns of "x". This is much faster than
       "mathnf" when "d" is known.

       The library syntax is hnfmod"(x,d)".

       mathnfmodid"(x,d)"

       outputs the (upper triangular) Hermite normal form of "x" concatenated
       with "d" times the identity matrix.

       The library syntax is hnfmodid"(x,d)".

       matid"(n)"

       creates the "n x n" identity matrix.

       The library syntax is idmat"(n)" where "n" is a "long".

       Related functions are gscalmat"(x,n)", which creates "x" times the
       identity matrix ("x" being a "GEN" and "n" a "long"), and gscals-
       mat"(x,n)" which is the same when "x" is a "long".

       matimage"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       gives a basis for the image of the matrix "x" as columns of a matrix. A
       priori the matrix can have entries of any type. If flag" = 0", use
       standard Gauss pivot. If flag" = 1", use "matsupplement".

       The library syntax is matimage0"(x,"flag")". Also available is
       image"(x)" (flag" = 0").

       matimagecompl"(x)"

       gives the vector of the column indices which are not extracted by the
       function "matimage". Hence the number of components of matimagecompl(x)
       plus the number of columns of matimage(x) is equal to the number of
       columns of the matrix "x".

       The library syntax is imagecompl"(x)".

       matindexrank"(x)"

       "x" being a matrix of rank "r", gives two vectors "y" and "z" of length
       "r" giving a list of rows and columns respectively (starting from 1)
       such that the extracted matrix obtained from these two vectors using
       "vecextract(x,y,z)" is invertible.

       The library syntax is indexrank"(x)".

       matintersect"(x,y)"

       "x" and "y" being two matrices with the same number of rows each of
       whose columns are independent, finds a basis of the Q-vector space
       equal to the intersection of the spaces spanned by the columns of "x"
       and "y" respectively. See also the function "idealintersect", which
       does the same for free Z-modules.

       The library syntax is intersect"(x,y)".

       matinverseimage"(x,y)"

       gives a column vector belonging to the inverse image of the column vec-
       tor "y" by the matrix "x" if one exists, the empty vector otherwise. To
       get the complete inverse image, it suffices to add to the result any
       element of the kernel of "x" obtained for example by "matker".

       The library syntax is inverseimage"(x,y)".

       matisdiagonal"(x)"

       returns true (1) if "x" is a diagonal matrix, false (0) if not.

       The library syntax is isdiagonal"(x)", and this returns a "long" inte-
       ger.

       matker"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       gives a basis for the kernel of the matrix "x" as columns of a matrix.
       A priori the matrix can have entries of any type.

       If "x" is known to have integral entries, set flag" = 1".

       Note: The library function "ker_mod_p(x, p)", where "x" has integer
       entries and "p" is prime, which is equivalent to but many orders of
       magnitude faster than "matker(x*Mod(1,p))" and needs much less stack
       space. To use it under GP, type "install(ker_mod_p, GG)" first.

       The library syntax is matker0"(x,"flag")". Also available are ker"(x)"
       (flag" = 0"), keri"(x)" (flag" = 1") and "ker_mod_p(x,p)".

       matkerint"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       gives an LLL-reduced Z-basis for the lattice equal to the kernel of the
       matrix "x" as columns of the matrix "x" with integer entries (rational
       entries are not permitted).

       If flag" = 0", uses a modified integer LLL algorithm.

       If flag" = 1", uses "matrixqz(x,-2)". If LLL reduction of the final
       result is not desired, you can save time using "matrixqz(matker(x),-2)"
       instead.

       If flag" = 2", uses another modified LLL. In the present version 2.2.0,
       only independent rows are allowed in this case.

       The library syntax is matkerint0"(x,"flag")". Also available is
       kerint"(x)" (flag" = 0").

       matmuldiagonal"(x,d)"

       product of the matrix "x" by the diagonal matrix whose diagonal entries
       are those of the vector "d". Equivalent to, but much faster than
       "x*matdiagonal(d)".

       The library syntax is matmuldiagonal"(x,d)".

       matmultodiagonal"(x,y)"

       product of the matrices "x" and "y" knowing that the result is a diago-
       nal matrix. Much faster than "x*y" in that case.

       The library syntax is matmultodiagonal"(x,y)".

       matpascal"(x,{q})"

       creates as a matrix the lower triangular Pascal triangle of order "x+1"
       (i.e. with binomial coefficients up to "x"). If "q" is given, compute
       the "q"-Pascal triangle (i.e. using "q"-binomial coefficients).

       The library syntax is matqpascal"(x,q)", where "x" is a "long" and "q =
       NULL" is used to omit "q". Also available is matpascal{x}.

       matrank"(x)"

       rank of the matrix "x".

       The library syntax is rank"(x)", and the result is a "long".

       matrix"(m,n,{X},{Y},{"expr" = 0})"

       creation of the "m x n" matrix whose coefficients are given by the
       expression expr. There are two formal parameters in expr, the first one
       ("X") corresponding to the rows, the second ("Y") to the columns, and
       "X" goes from 1 to "m", "Y" goes from 1 to "n". If one of the last 3
       parameters is omitted, fill the matrix with zeroes.

       The library syntax is matrice"(GEN nlig,GEN ncol,entree *e1,entree
       *e2,char *expr)".

       matrixqz"(x,p)"

       "x" being an "m x n" matrix with "m >= n" with rational or integer
       entries, this function has varying behaviour depending on the sign of
       "p":

       If "p >= 0", "x" is assumed to be of maximal rank. This function
       returns a matrix having only integral entries, having the same image as
       "x", such that the GCD of all its "n x n" subdeterminants is equal to 1
       when "p" is equal to 0, or not divisible by "p" otherwise. Here "p"
       must be a prime number (when it is non-zero). However, if the function
       is used when "p" has no small prime factors, it will either work or
       give the message ``impossible inverse modulo'' and a non-trivial divi-
       sor of "p".

       If "p = -1", this function returns a matrix whose columns form a basis
       of the lattice equal to Z"^n" intersected with the lattice generated by
       the columns of "x".

       If "p = -2", returns a matrix whose columns form a basis of the lattice
       equal to Z"^n" intersected with the Q-vector space generated by the
       columns of "x".

       The library syntax is matrixqz0"(x,p)".

       matsize"(x)"

       "x" being a vector or matrix, returns a row vector with two components,
       the first being the number of rows (1 for a row vector), the second the
       number of columns (1 for a column vector).

       The library syntax is matsize"(x)".

       matsnf"(X,{"flag" = 0})"

       if "X" is a (singular or non-singular) square matrix outputs the vector
       of elementary divisors of "X" (i.e. the diagonal of the Smith normal
       form of "X").

       The binary digits of flag mean:

       1 (complete output): if set, outputs "[U,V,D]", where "U" and "V" are
       two unimodular matrices such that "UXV" is the diagonal matrix "D".
       Otherwise output only the diagonal of "D".

       2 (generic input): if set, allows polynomial entries. Otherwise, assume
       that "X" has integer coefficients.

       4 (cleanup): if set, cleans up the output. This means that elementary
       divisors equal to 1 will be deleted, i.e. outputs a shortened vector
       "D'" instead of "D". If complete output was required, returns
       "[U',V',D']" so that "U'XV' = D'" holds. If this flag is set, "X" is
       allowed to be of the form "D" or "[U,V,D]" as would normally be output
       with the cleanup flag unset.

       The library syntax is matsnf0"(X,"flag")". Also available is smith"(X)"
       (flag" = 0").

       matsolve"(x,y)"

       "x" being an invertible matrix and "y" a column vector, finds the solu-
       tion "u" of "x*u = y", using Gaussian elimination. This has the same
       effect as, but is a bit faster, than "x^{-1}*y".

       The library syntax is gauss"(x,y)".

       matsolvemod"(m,d,y,{"flag" = 0})"

       "m" being any integral matrix, "d" a vector of positive integer moduli,
       and "y" an integral column vector, gives a small integer solution to
       the system of congruences sum"_i m_{i,j}x_j = y_i (mod d_i)" if one
       exists, otherwise returns zero. Shorthand notation: "y" (resp. "d") can
       be given as a single integer, in which case all the "y_i" (resp. "d_i")
       above are taken to be equal to "y" (resp. "d").

       If flag" = 1", all solutions are returned in the form of a two-compo-
       nent row vector "[x,u]", where "x" is a small integer solution to the
       system of congruences and "u" is a matrix whose columns give a basis of
       the homogeneous system (so that all solutions can be obtained by adding
       "x" to any linear combination of columns of "u"). If no solution
       exists, returns zero.

       The library syntax is matsolvemod0"(m,d,y,"flag")". Also available are
       gaussmodulo"(m,d,y)" (flag" = 0") and gaussmodulo2"(m,d,y)" (flag" =
       1").

       matsupplement"(x)"

       assuming that the columns of the matrix "x" are linearly independent
       (if they are not, an error message is issued), finds a square invert-
       ible matrix whose first columns are the columns of "x", i.e. supplement
       the columns of "x" to a basis of the whole space.

       The library syntax is suppl"(x)".

       mattranspose"(x)" or "x~"

       transpose of "x".  This has an effect only on vectors and matrices.

       The library syntax is gtrans"(x)".

       qfgaussred"(q)"

       decomposition into squares of the quadratic form represented by the
       symmetric matrix "q". The result is a matrix whose diagonal entries are
       the coefficients of the squares, and the non-diagonal entries represent
       the bilinear forms. More precisely, if "(a_{ij})" denotes the output,
       one has

	" q(x) = "sum"_i a_{ii} (x_i + "sum"_{j > i} a_{ij} x_j)^2 "

       The library syntax is sqred"(x)".

       qfjacobi"(x)"

       "x" being a real symmetric matrix, this gives a vector having two com-
       ponents: the first one is the vector of eigenvalues of "x", the second
       is the corresponding orthogonal matrix of eigenvectors of "x". The
       method used is Jacobi's method for symmetric matrices.

       The library syntax is jacobi"(x)".

       qflll"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       LLL algorithm applied to the columns of the (not necessarily square)
       matrix "x". The columns of "x" must however be linearly independent,
       unless specified otherwise below. The result is a transformation matrix
       "T" such that "x.T" is an LLL-reduced basis of the lattice generated by
       the column vectors of "x".

       If flag" = 0" (default), the computations are done with real numbers
       (i.e. not with rational numbers) hence are fast but as presently pro-
       grammed (version 2.2.0) are numerically unstable.

       If flag" = 1", it is assumed that the corresponding Gram matrix is
       integral.  The computation is done entirely with integers and the algo-
       rithm is both accurate and quite fast. In this case, "x" needs not be
       of maximal rank, but if it is not, "T" will not be square.

       If flag" = 2", similar to case 1, except "x" should be an integer
       matrix whose columns are linearly independent. The lattice generated by
       the columns of "x" is first partially reduced before applying the LLL
       algorithm. [A basis is said to be partially reduced if "|v_i +- v_j| >=
       |v_i|" for any two distinct basis vectors "v_i,	v_j".]

       This can be significantly faster than flag" = 1" when one row is huge
       compared to the other rows.

       If flag" = 3", all computations are done in rational numbers. This does
       not incur numerical instability, but is extremely slow. This function
       is essentially superseded by case 1, so will soon disappear.

       If flag" = 4", "x" is assumed to have integral entries, but needs not
       be of maximal rank. The result is a two-component vector of matrices :
       the columns of the first matrix represent a basis of the integer kernel
       of "x" (not necessarily LLL-reduced) and the second matrix is the
       transformation matrix "T" such that "x.T" is an LLL-reduced Z-basis of
       the image of the matrix "x".

       If flag" = 5", case as case 4, but "x" may have polynomial coeffi-
       cients.

       If flag" = 7", uses an older version of case 0 above.

       If flag" = 8", same as case 0, where "x" may have polynomial coeffi-
       cients.

       If flag" = 9", variation on case 1, using content.

       The library syntax is qflll0"(x,"flag","prec")". Also available are
       lll"(x,"prec")" (flag" = 0"), lllint"(x)" (flag" = 1"), and lllk-
       erim"(x)" (flag" = 4").

       qflllgram"(x,{"flag" = 0})"

       same as "qflll" except that the matrix "x" which must now be a square
       symmetric real matrix is the Gram matrix of the lattice vectors, and
       not the coordinates of the vectors themselves. The result is again the
       transformation matrix "T" which gives (as columns) the coefficients
       with respect to the initial basis vectors. The flags have more or less
       the same meaning, but some are missing. In brief:

       flag" = 0": numerically unstable in the present version 2.2.0.

       flag" = 1": "x" has integer entries, the computations are all done in
       integers.

       flag" = 4": "x" has integer entries, gives the kernel and reduced
       image.

       flag" = 5": same as 4 for generic "x".

       flag" = 7": an older version of case 0.

       The library syntax is qflllgram0"(x,"flag","prec")". Also available are
       lllgram"(x,"prec")" (flag" = 0"), lllgramint"(x)" (flag" = 1"), and
       lllgramkerim"(x)" (flag" = 4").

       qfminim"(x,b,m,{"flag" = 0})"

       "x" being a square and symmetric matrix representing a positive defi-
       nite quadratic form, this function deals with the minimal vectors of
       "x", depending on flag.

       If flag" = 0" (default), seeks vectors of square norm less than or
       equal to "b" (for the norm defined by "x"), and at most "2m" of these
       vectors. The result is a three-component vector, the first component
       being the number of vectors, the second being the maximum norm found,
       and the last vector is a matrix whose columns are the vectors found,
       only one being given for each pair "+- v" (at most "m" such pairs).

       If flag" = 1", ignores "m" and returns the first vector whose norm is
       less than "b".

       In both these cases, "x" is assumed to have integral entries, and the
       function searches for the minimal non-zero vectors whenever "b = 0".

       If flag" = 2", "x" can have non integral real entries, but "b = 0" is
       now meaningless (uses Fincke-Pohst algorithm).

       The library syntax is qfminim0"(x,b,m,"flag","prec")", also available
       are  minim"(x,b,m)" (flag" = 0"),  minim2"(x,b,m)" (flag" = 1"), and
       finally
	fincke_pohst"(x,b,m,"prec")" (flag" = 2").

       qfperfection"(x)"

       "x" being a square and symmetric matrix with integer entries represent-
       ing a positive definite quadratic form, outputs the perfection rank of
       the form. That is, gives the rank of the family of the "s" symmetric
       matrices "v_iv_i^t", where "s" is half the number of minimal vectors
       and the "v_i" ("1 <= i <= s") are the minimal vectors.

       As a side note to old-timers, this used to fail bluntly when "x" had
       more than 5000 minimal vectors. Beware that the computations can now be
       very lengthy when "x" has many minimal vectors.

       The library syntax is perf"(x)".

       qfsign"(x)"

       signature of the quadratic form represented by the symmetric matrix
       "x". The result is a two-component vector.

       The library syntax is signat"(x)".

       setintersect"(x,y)"

       intersection of the two sets "x" and "y".

       The library syntax is setintersect"(x,y)".

       setisset"(x)"

       returns true (1) if "x" is a set, false (0) if not. In PARI, a set is
       simply a row vector whose entries are strictly increasing. To convert
       any vector (and other objects) into a set, use the function "Set".

       The library syntax is setisset"(x)", and this returns a "long".

       setminus"(x,y)"

       difference of the two sets "x" and "y", i.e. set of elements of "x"
       which do not belong to "y".

       The library syntax is setminus"(x,y)".

       setsearch"(x,y,{"flag" = 0})"

       searches if "y" belongs to the set "x". If it does and flag is zero or
       omitted, returns the index "j" such that "x[j] = y", otherwise returns
       0. If flag is non-zero returns the index "j" where "y" should be
       inserted, and 0 if it already belongs to "x" (this is meant to be used
       in conjunction with "listinsert").

       This function works also if "x" is a sorted list (see "listsort").

       The library syntax is setsearch"(x,y,"flag")" which returns a "long"
       integer.

       setunion"(x,y)"

       union of the two sets "x" and "y".

       The library syntax is setunion"(x,y)".

       trace"(x)"

       this applies to quite general "x". If "x" is not a matrix, it is equal
       to the sum of "x" and its conjugate, except for polmods where it is the
       trace as an algebraic number.

       For "x" a square matrix, it is the ordinary trace. If "x" is a non-
       square matrix (but not a vector), an error occurs.

       The library syntax is gtrace"(x)".

       vecextract"(x,y,{z})"

       extraction of components of the vector or matrix "x" according to "y".
       In case "x" is a matrix, its components are as usual the columns of
       "x". The parameter "y" is a component specifier, which is either an
       integer, a string describing a range, or a vector.

       If "y" is an integer, it is considered as a mask: the binary bits of
       "y" are read from right to left, but correspond to taking the compo-
       nents from left to right. For example, if "y = 13 = (1101)_2" then the
       components 1,3 and 4 are extracted.

       If "y" is a vector, which must have integer entries, these entries cor-
       respond to the component numbers to be extracted, in the order speci-
       fied.

       If "y" is a string, it can be

       * a single (non-zero) index giving a component number (a negative index
       means we start counting from the end).

       * a range of the form "a..b", where "a" and "b" are indexes as above.
       Any of "a" and "b" can be omitted; in this case, we take as default
       values "a = 1" and "b = -1", i.e. the first and last components respec-
       tively. We then extract all components in the interval "[a,b]", in
       reverse order if "b < a".

       In addition, if the first character in the string is "^", the comple-
       ment of the given set of indices is taken.

       If "z" is not omitted, "x" must be a matrix. "y" is then the line spec-
       ifier, and "z" the column specifier, where the component specifier is
       as explained above.

	 ? v = [a, b, c, d, e];
	 ? vecextract(v, 5)	     \\ mask
	 %1 = [a, c]
	 ? vecextract(v, [4, 2, 1])  \\ component list
	 %2 = [d, b, a]
	 ? vecextract(v, "2..4")     \\ interval
	 %3 = [b, c, d]
	 ? vecextract(v, "-1..-3")   \\ interval + reverse order
	 %4 = [e, d, c]
	 ? vecextract([1,2,3], "^2") \\ complement
	 %5 = [1, 3]
	 ? vecextract(matid(3), "2..", "..")
	 %6 =
	 [0 1 0]

	 [0 0 1]

       The library syntax is extract"(x,y)" or matextract"(x,y,z)".

       vecsort"(x,{k},{"flag" = 0})"

       sorts the vector "x" in ascending order, using the heapsort method. "x"
       must be a vector, and its components integers, reals, or fractions.

       If "k" is present and is an integer, sorts according to the value of
       the "k"-th subcomponents of the components of "x". "k" can also be a
       vector, in which case the sorting is done lexicographically according
       to the components listed in the vector "k". For example, if "k =
       [2,1,3]", sorting will be done with respect to the second component,
       and when these are equal, with respect to the first, and when these are
       equal, with respect to the third.

       The binary digits of flag mean:

       * 1: indirect sorting of the vector "x", i.e. if "x" is an "n"-compo-
       nent vector, returns a permutation of "[1,2,...,n]" which applied to
       the components of "x" sorts "x" in increasing order.  For example,
       "vecextract(x, vecsort(x,,1))" is equivalent to vecsort(x).

       * 2: sorts "x" by ascending lexicographic order (as per the "lex" com-
       parison function).

       * 4: use decreasing instead of ascending order.

       The library syntax is vecsort0"(x,k,flag)". To omit "k", use "NULL"
       instead. You can also use the simpler functions

       sort"(x)" ( = "vecsort0(x,NULL,0)").

       indexsort"(x)" ( = "vecsort0(x,NULL,1)").

       lexsort"(x)" ( = "vecsort0(x,NULL,2)").

       Also available are sindexsort and sindexlexsort which return a vector
       of C-long integers (private type "t_VECSMALL") "v", where "v[1]...v[n]"
       contain the indices. Note that the resulting "v" is not a generic PARI
       object, but is in general easier to use in C programs!

       vector"(n,{X},{"expr" = 0})"

       creates a row vector (type "t_VEC") with "n" components whose compo-
       nents are the expression expr evaluated at the integer points between 1
       and "n". If one of the last two arguments is omitted, fill the vector
       with zeroes.

       The library syntax is vecteur"(GEN nmax, entree *ep, char *expr)".

       vectorv"(n,X,"expr")"

       as vector, but returns a column vector (type "t_COL").

       The library syntax is vvecteur"(GEN nmax, entree *ep, char *expr)".

Sums, products, integrals and similar functions
       Although the GP calculator is programmable, it is useful to have pre-
       programmed a number of loops, including sums, products, and a certain
       number of recursions. Also, a number of functions from numerical analy-
       sis like numerical integration and summation of series will be
       described here.

       One of the parameters in these loops must be the control variable,
       hence a simple variable name. The last parameter can be any legal PARI
       expression, including of course expressions using loops. Since it is
       much easier to program directly the loops in library mode, these func-
       tions are mainly useful for GP programming. The use of these functions
       in library mode is a little tricky and its explanation will be mostly
       omitted, although the reader can try and figure it out by himself by
       checking the example given for the "sum" function. In this section we
       only give the library syntax, with no semantic explanation.

       The letter "X" will always denote any simple variable name, and repre-
       sents the formal parameter used in the function.

       (numerical) integration: A number of Romberg-like integration methods
       are implemented (see "intnum" as opposed to "intformal" which we
       already described). The user should not require too much accuracy: 18
       or 28 decimal digits is OK, but not much more.  In addition, analytical
       cleanup of the integral must have been done: there must be no singular-
       ities in the interval or at the boundaries. In practice this can be
       accomplished with a simple change of variable. Furthermore, for
       improper integrals, where one or both of the limits of integration are
       plus or minus infinity, the function must decrease sufficiently rapidly
       at infinity. This can often be accomplished through integration by
       parts.  Finally, the function to be integrated should not be very small
       (compared to the current precision) on the entire interval. This can of
       course be accomplished by just multiplying by an appropriate constant.

       Note that infinity can be represented with essentially no loss of accu-
       racy by 1e4000. However beware of real underflow when dealing with
       rapidly decreasing functions. For example, if one wants to compute the
       int"_0^ oo e^{-x^2}dx" to 28 decimal digits, then one should set infin-
       ity equal to 10 for example, and certainly not to 1e4000.

       The integrand may have values belonging to a vector space over the real
       numbers; in particular, it can be complex-valued or vector-valued.

       See also the discrete summation methods below (sharing the prefix
       "sum").

       intnum"(X = a,b,"expr",{"flag" = 0})"

       numerical integration of expr (smooth in "]a,b["), with respect to "X".

       Set flag" = 0" (or omit it altogether) when "a" and "b" are not too
       large, the function is smooth, and can be evaluated exactly everywhere
       on the interval "[a,b]".

       If flag" = 1", uses a general driver routine for doing numerical inte-
       gration, making no particular assumption (slow).

       flag" = 2" is tailored for being used when "a" or "b" are infinite. One
       must have "ab > 0", and in fact if for example "b = + oo ", then it is
       preferable to have "a" as large as possible, at least "a >= 1".

       If flag" = 3", the function is allowed to be undefined (but continuous)
       at "a" or "b", for example the function	sin "(x)/x" at "x = 0".

       The library syntax is intnum0"(entree*e,GEN a,GEN b,char*expr,long
       "flag",long prec)".

       prod"(X = a,b,"expr",{x = 1})"

       product of expression expr, initialized at "x", the formal parameter
       "X" going from "a" to "b". As for "sum", the main purpose of the ini-
       tialization parameter "x" is to force the type of the operations being
       performed. For example if it is set equal to the integer 1, operations
       will start being done exactly. If it is set equal to the real 1., they
       will be done using real numbers having the default precision. If it is
       set equal to the power series "1+O(X^k)" for a certain "k", they will
       be done using power series of precision at most "k". These are the
       three most common initializations.

       As an extreme example, compare

	 ? prod(i=1, 100, 1 - X^i);  \\ this has degree 5050 !!
	 time = 3,335 ms.
	 ? prod(i=1, 100, 1 - X^i, 1 + O(X^101))
	 time = 43 ms.
	 %2 = 1 - X - X^2 + X^5 + X^7 - X^12 - X^15 + X^22 + X^26 - X^35 - X^40 + \
	   X^51 + X^57 - X^70 - X^77 + X^92 + X^100 + O(X^101)

       The library syntax is produit"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr,
       GEN x)".

       prodeuler"(X = a,b,"expr")"

       product of expression expr, initialized at 1. (i.e. to a real number
       equal to 1 to the current "realprecision"), the formal parameter "X"
       ranging over the prime numbers between "a" and "b".

       The library syntax is prodeuler"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr,
       long prec)".

       prodinf"(X = a,"expr",{"flag" = 0})"

       infinite product of expression expr, the formal parameter "X" starting
       at "a". The evaluation stops when the relative error of the expression
       minus 1 is less than the default precision. The expressions must always
       evaluate to an element of C.

       If flag" = 1", do the product of the ("1+"expr) instead.

       The library syntax is prodinf"(entree *ep, GEN a, char *expr, long
       prec)" (flag" = 0"), or prodinf1 with the same arguments (flag" = 1").

       solve"(X = a,b,"expr")"

       find a real root of expression expr between "a" and "b", under the con-
       dition expr"(X = a) * "expr"(X = b) <= 0".  This routine uses Brent's
       method and can fail miserably if expr is not defined in the whole of
       "[a,b]" (try "solve(x = 1, 2, tan(x)").

       The library syntax is zbrent"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr,
       long prec)".

       sum"(X = a,b,"expr",{x = 0})"

       sum of expression expr, initialized at "x", the formal parameter going
       from "a" to "b". As for "prod", the initialization parameter "x" may be
       given to force the type of the operations being performed.

       As an extreme example, compare

	 ? sum(i=1, 5000, 1/i); \\ rational number: denominator has 2166 digits.
	 time = 1,241 ms.
	 ? sum(i=1, 5000, 1/i, 0.)
	 time = 158 ms.
	 %2 = 9.094508852984436967261245533

       The library syntax is somme"(entree *ep, GEN a, GEN b, char *expr, GEN
       x)". This is to be used as follows: "ep" represents the dummy variable
       used in the expression "expr"

	 /* compute a^2 + ... + b^2 */
	 {
	   /* define the dummy variable "i" */
	   entree *ep = is_entry("i");
	   /* sum for a <= i <= b */
	   return somme(ep, a, b, "i^2", gzero);
	 }

       sumalt"(X = a,"expr",{"flag" = 0})"

       numerical summation of the series expr, which should be an alternating
       series, the formal variable "X" starting at "a".

       If flag" = 0", use an algorithm of F. Villegas as modified by
       D. Zagier. This is much better than Euler-Van Wijngaarden's method
       which was used formerly.	 Beware that the stopping criterion is that
       the term gets small enough, hence terms which are equal to 0 will cre-
       ate problems and should be removed.

       If flag" = 1", use a variant with slightly different polynomials. Some-
       times faster.

       Divergent alternating series can sometimes be summed by this method, as
       well as series which are not exactly alternating (see for example
       "Label se:user_defined").

       Important hint: a significant speed gain can be obtained by writing the
       "(-1)^X" which may occur in the expression as "(1. - X%2*2)".

       The library syntax is sumalt"(entree *ep, GEN a, char *expr, long
       "flag", long prec)".

       sumdiv"(n,X,"expr")"

       sum of expression expr over the positive divisors of "n".

       Arithmetic functions like sigma use the multiplicativity of the under-
       lying expression to speed up the computation. In the present version
       2.2.0, there is no way to indicate that expr is multiplicative in "n",
       hence specialized functions should be prefered whenever possible.

       The library syntax is divsum"(entree *ep, GEN num, char *expr)".

       suminf"(X = a,"expr")"

       infinite sum of expression expr, the formal parameter "X" starting at
       "a". The evaluation stops when the relative error of the expression is
       less than the default precision.	 The expressions must always evaluate
       to a complex number.

       The library syntax is suminf"(entree *ep, GEN a, char *expr, long
       prec)".

       sumpos"(X = a,"expr",{"flag" = 0})"

       numerical summation of the series expr, which must be a series of terms
       having the same sign, the formal variable "X" starting at "a". The
       algorithm used is Van Wijngaarden's trick for converting such a series
       into an alternating one, and is quite slow.  Beware that the stopping
       criterion is that the term gets small enough, hence terms which are
       equal to 0 will create problems and should be removed.

       If flag" = 1", use slightly different polynomials. Sometimes faster.

       The library syntax is sumpos"(entree *ep, GEN a, char *expr, long
       "flag", long prec)".

Plotting functions
       Although plotting is not even a side purpose of PARI, a number of plot-
       ting functions are provided. Moreover, a lot of people felt like sug-
       gesting ideas or submitting huge patches for this section of the code.
       Among these, special thanks go to Klaus-Peter Nischke who suggested the
       recursive plotting and the forking/resizing stuff under X11, and Ilya
       Zakharevich who undertook a complete rewrite of the graphic code, so
       that most of it is now platform-independent and should be relatively
       easy to port or expand.

       These graphic functions are either

       * high-level plotting functions (all the functions starting with
       "ploth") in which the user has little to do but explain what type of
       plot he wants, and whose syntax is similar to the one used in the pre-
       ceding section (with somewhat more complicated flags).

       * low-level plotting functions, where every drawing primitive (point,
       line, box, etc.) must be specified by the user. These low-level func-
       tions (called rectplot functions, sharing the prefix "plot") work as
       follows. You have at your disposal 16 virtual windows which are filled
       independently, and can then be physically ORed on a single window at
       user-defined positions. These windows are numbered from 0 to 15, and
       must be initialized before being used by the function "plotinit", which
       specifies the height and width of the virtual window (called a rectwin-
       dow in the sequel). At all times, a virtual cursor (initialized at
       "[0,0]") is associated to the window, and its current value can be
       obtained using the function "plotcursor".

       A number of primitive graphic objects (called rect objects) can then be
       drawn in these windows, using a default color associated to that window
       (which can be changed under X11, using the "plotcolor" function, black
       otherwise) and only the part of the object which is inside the window
       will be drawn, with the exception of polygons and strings which are
       drawn entirely (but the virtual cursor can move outside of the window).
       The ones sharing the prefix "plotr" draw relatively to the current
       position of the virtual cursor, the others use absolute coordinates.
       Those having the prefix "plotrecth" put in the rectwindow a large batch
       of rect objects corresponding to the output of the related "ploth"
       function.

       Finally, the actual physical drawing is done using the function "plot-
       draw". Note that the windows are preserved so that further drawings
       using the same windows at different positions or different windows can
       be done without extra work. If you want to erase a window (and free the
       corresponding memory), use the function "plotkill". It is not possible
       to partially erase a window. Erase it completely, initialize it again
       and then fill it with the graphic objects that you want to keep.

       In addition to initializing the window, you may want to have a scaled
       window to avoid unnecessary conversions. For this, use the function
       "plotscale" below. As long as this function is not called, the scaling
       is simply the number of pixels, the origin being at the upper left and
       the "y"-coordinates going downwards.

       Note that in the present version 2.2.0 all these plotting functions
       (both low and high level) have been written for the X11-window system
       (hence also for GUI's based on X11 such as Openwindows and Motif) only,
       though very little code remains which is actually platform-dependent. A
       Suntools/Sunview, Macintosh, and an Atari/Gem port were provided for
       previous versions. These may be adapted in future releases.

       Under X11/Suntools, the physical window (opened by "plotdraw" or any of
       the "ploth*" functions) is completely separated from GP (technically, a
       "fork" is done, and the non-graphical memory is immediately freed in
       the child process), which means you can go on working in the current GP
       session, without having to kill the window first. Under X11, this win-
       dow can be closed, enlarged or reduced using the standard window man-
       ager functions.	No zooming procedure is implemented though (yet).

       * Finally, note that in the same way that "printtex" allows you to have
       a TeX output corresponding to printed results, the functions starting
       with "ps" allow you to have "PostScript" output of the plots. This will
       not be absolutely identical with the screen output, but will be suffi-
       ciently close. Note that you can use PostScript output even if you do
       not have the plotting routines enabled. The PostScript output is writ-
       ten in a file whose name is derived from the "psfile" default
       ("./pari.ps" if you did not tamper with it). Each time a new PostScript
       output is asked for, the PostScript output is appended to that file.
       Hence the user must remove this file, or change the value of "psfile",
       first if he does not want unnecessary drawings from preceding sessions
       to appear. On the other hand, in this manner as many plots as desired
       can be kept in a single file.

       None of the graphic functions are available within the PARI library,
       you must be under GP to use them. The reason for that is that you
       really should not use PARI for heavy-duty graphical work, there are
       much better specialized alternatives around. This whole set of routines
       was only meant as a convenient, but simple-minded, visual aid. If you
       really insist on using these in your program (we warned you), the
       source ("plot*.c") should be readable enough for you to achieve some-
       thing.

       plot"(X = a,b,"expr",{"Ymin"},{"Ymax"})"

       crude (ASCII) plot of the function represented by expression expr from
       "a" to "b", with Y ranging from Ymin to Ymax. If Ymin (resp. Ymax) is
       not given, the minima (resp. the maxima) of the computed values of the
       expression is used instead.

       plotbox"(w,x2,y2)"

       let "(x1,y1)" be the current position of the virtual cursor. Draw in
       the rectwindow "w" the outline of the rectangle which is such that the
       points "(x1,y1)" and "(x2,y2)" are opposite corners. Only the part of
       the rectangle which is in "w" is drawn. The virtual cursor does not
       move.

       plotclip"(w)"

       `clips' the content of rectwindow "w", i.e remove all parts of the
       drawing that would not be visible on the screen.	 Together with "plot-
       copy" this function enables you to draw on a scratchpad before commit-
       ing the part you're interested in to the final picture.

       plotcolor"(w,c)"

       set default color to "c" in rectwindow "w".  In present version 2.2.0,
       this is only implemented for X11 window system, and you only have the
       following palette to choose from:

       1 = black, 2 = blue, 3 = sienna, 4 = red, 5 = cornsilk, 6 = grey, 7 =
       gainsborough.

       Note that it should be fairly easy for you to hardwire some more colors
       by tweaking the files "rect.h" and "plotX.c". User-defined colormaps
       would be nice, and may be available in future versions.

       plotcopy"(w1,w2,dx,dy)"

       copy the contents of rectwindow "w1" to rectwindow "w2", with offset
       "(dx,dy)".

       plotcursor"(w)"

       give as a 2-component vector the current (scaled) position of the vir-
       tual cursor corresponding to the rectwindow "w".

       plotdraw"(list)"

       physically draw the rectwindows given in "list" which must be a vector
       whose number of components is divisible by 3. If "list =
       [w1,x1,y1,w2,x2,y2,...]", the windows "w1", "w2", etc. are physically
       placed with their upper left corner at physical position "(x1,y1)",
       "(x2,y2)",...respectively, and are then drawn together.	Overlapping
       regions will thus be drawn twice, and the windows are considered trans-
       parent. Then display the whole drawing in a special window on your
       screen.

       plotfile"(s)"

       set the output file for plotting output. Special filename "-" redirects
       to the same place as PARI output.

       ploth"(X = a,b,"expr",{"flag" = 0},{n = 0})"

       high precision plot of the function "y = f(x)" represented by the
       expression expr, "x" going from "a" to "b". This opens a specific win-
       dow (which is killed whenever you click on it), and returns a four-com-
       ponent vector giving the coordinates of the bounding box in the form
       "["xmin","xmax","ymin","ymax"]".

       Important note: Since this may involve a lot of function calls, it is
       advised to keep the current precision to a minimum (e.g. 9) before
       calling this function.

       "n" specifies the number of reference point on the graph (0 means use
       the hardwired default values, that is: 1000 for general plot, 1500 for
       parametric plot, and 15 for recursive plot).

       If no flag is given, expr is either a scalar expression f(X), in which
       case the plane curve "y = f(X)" will be drawn, or a vector
       "[f_1(X),...,f_k(X)]", and then all the curves "y = f_i(X)" will be
       drawn in the same window.

       The binary digits of flag mean:

       * 1: parametric plot. Here expr must be a vector with an even number of
       components. Successive pairs are then understood as the parametric
       coordinates of a plane curve. Each of these are then drawn.

       For instance:

       "ploth(X = 0,2*Pi,[sin(X),cos(X)],1)" will draw a circle.

       "ploth(X = 0,2*Pi,[sin(X),cos(X)])" will draw two entwined sinusoidal
       curves.

       "ploth(X = 0,2*Pi,[X,X,sin(X),cos(X)],1)" will draw a circle and the
       line "y = x".

       * 2: recursive plot. If this flag is set, only one curve can be drawn
       at time, i.e. expr must be either a two-component vector (for a single
       parametric curve, and the parametric flag has to be set), or a scalar
       function. The idea is to choose pairs of successive reference points,
       and if their middle point is not too far away from the segment joining
       them, draw this as a local approximation to the curve.  Otherwise, add
       the middle point to the reference points. This is very fast, and usu-
       ally more precise than usual plot. Compare the results of

	"ploth(X = -1,1,sin(1/X),2)  and  ploth(X = -1,1,sin(1/X))"

       for instance. But beware that if you are extremely unlucky, or choose
       too few reference points, you may draw some nice polygon bearing little
       resemblance to the original curve. For instance you should never plot
       recursively an odd function in a symmetric interval around 0. Try

	   ploth(x = -20, 20, sin(x), 2)

       to see why. Hence, it's usually a good idea to try and plot the same
       curve with slightly different parameters.

       The other values toggle various display options:

       * 4: do not rescale plot according to the computed extrema. This is
       meant to be used when graphing multiple functions on a rectwindow (as a
       "plotrecth" call), in conjuction with "plotscale".

       * 8: do not print the "x"-axis.

       * 16: do not print the "y"-axis.

       * 32: do not print frame.

       * 64: only plot reference points, do not join them.

       * 256: use splines to interpolate the points.

       * 512: plot no "x"-ticks.

       * 1024: plot no "y"-ticks.

       * 2048: plot all ticks with the same length.

       plothraw"("listx","listy",{"flag" = 0})"

       given listx and listy two vectors of equal length, plots (in high pre-
       cision) the points whose "(x,y)"-coordinates are given in listx and
       listy. Automatic positioning and scaling is done, but with the same
       scaling factor on "x" and "y". If flag is 1, join points, other non-0
       flags toggle display options and should be combinations of bits "2^k",
       "k
	>= 3" as in "ploth".

       plothsizes"()"

       return data corresponding to the output window in the form of a 6-com-
       ponent vector: window width and height, sizes for ticks in horizontal
       and vertical directions (this is intended for the "gnuplot" interface
       and is currently not significant), width and height of characters.

       plotinit"(w,x,y)"

       initialize the rectwindow "w" to width "x" and height "y", and position
       the virtual cursor at "(0,0)". This destroys any rect objects you may
       have already drawn in "w".

       The plotting device imposes an upper bound for "x" and "y", for
       instance the number of pixels for screen output. These bounds are
       available through the "plothsizes" function. The following sequence
       initializes in a portable way (i.e independant of the output device) a
       window of maximal size, accessed through coordinates in the "[0,1000]
       x [0,1000]" range :

	 s = plothsizes();
	 plotinit(0, s[1]-1, s[2]-1);
	 plotscale(0, 0,1000, 0,1000);

       plotkill"(w)"

       erase rectwindow "w" and free the corresponding memory. Note that if
       you want to use the rectwindow "w" again, you have to use "initrect"
       first to specify the new size. So it's better in this case to use "ini-
       trect" directly as this throws away any previous work in the given
       rectwindow.

       plotlines"(w,X,Y,{"flag" = 0})"

       draw on the rectwindow "w" the polygon such that the (x,y)-coordinates
       of the vertices are in the vectors of equal length "X" and "Y". For
       simplicity, the whole polygon is drawn, not only the part of the poly-
       gon which is inside the rectwindow. If flag is non-zero, close the
       polygon. In any case, the virtual cursor does not move.

       "X" and "Y" are allowed to be scalars (in this case, both have to).
       There, a single segment will be drawn, between the virtual cursor cur-
       rent position and the point "(X,Y)". And only the part thereof which
       actually lies within the boundary of "w". Then move the virtual cursor
       to "(X,Y)", even if it is outside the window. If you want to draw a
       line from "(x1,y1)" to "(x2,y2)" where "(x1,y1)" is not necessarily the
       position of the virtual cursor, use "plotmove(w,x1,y1)" before using
       this function.

       plotlinetype"(w,"type")"

       change the type of lines subsequently plotted in rectwindow "w". type
       "-2" corresponds to frames, "-1" to axes, larger values may correspond
       to something else. "w = -1" changes highlevel plotting. This is only
       taken into account by the "gnuplot" interface.

       plotmove"(w,x,y)"

       move the virtual cursor of the rectwindow "w" to position "(x,y)".

       plotpoints"(w,X,Y)"

       draw on the rectwindow "w" the points whose "(x,y)"-coordinates are in
       the vectors of equal length "X" and "Y" and which are inside "w". The
       virtual cursor does not move. This is basically the same function as
       "plothraw", but either with no scaling factor or with a scale chosen
       using the function "plotscale".

       As was the case with the "plotlines" function, "X" and "Y" are allowed
       to be (simultaneously) scalar. In this case, draw the single point
       "(X,Y)" on the rectwindow "w" (if it is actually inside "w"), and in
       any case move the virtual cursor to position "(x,y)".

       plotpointsize"(w,size)"

       changes the ``size'' of following points in rectwindow "w". If "w =
       -1", change it in all rectwindows.  This only works in the "gnuplot"
       interface.

       plotpointtype"(w,"type")"

       change the type of points subsequently plotted in rectwindow "w". type"
       = -1" corresponds to a dot, larger values may correspond to something
       else. "w = -1" changes highlevel plotting. This is only taken into
       account by the "gnuplot" interface.

       plotrbox"(w,dx,dy)"

       draw in the rectwindow "w" the outline of the rectangle which is such
       that the points "(x1,y1)" and "(x1+dx,y1+dy)" are opposite corners,
       where "(x1,y1)" is the current position of the cursor.  Only the part
       of the rectangle which is in "w" is drawn. The virtual cursor does not
       move.

       plotrecth"(w,X = a,b,"expr",{"flag" = 0},{n = 0})"

       writes to rectwindow "w" the curve output of "ploth""(w,X =
       a,b,"expr","flag",n)".

       plotrecthraw"(w,"data",{"flag" = 0})"

       plot graph(s) for data in rectwindow "w". flag has the same signifi-
       cance here as in "ploth", though recursive plot is no more significant.

       data is a vector of vectors, each corresponding to a list a coordi-
       nates.  If parametric plot is set, there must be an even number of vec-
       tors, each successive pair corresponding to a curve. Otherwise, the
       first one containe the "x" coordinates, and the other ones contain the
       "y"-coordinates of curves to plot.

       plotrline"(w,dx,dy)"

       draw in the rectwindow "w" the part of the segment
       "(x1,y1)-(x1+dx,y1+dy)" which is inside "w", where "(x1,y1)" is the
       current position of the virtual cursor, and move the virtual cursor to
       "(x1+dx,y1+dy)" (even if it is outside the window).

       plotrmove"(w,dx,dy)"

       move the virtual cursor of the rectwindow "w" to position
       "(x1+dx,y1+dy)", where "(x1,y1)" is the initial position of the cursor
       (i.e. to position "(dx,dy)" relative to the initial cursor).

       plotrpoint"(w,dx,dy)"

       draw the point "(x1+dx,y1+dy)" on the rectwindow "w" (if it is inside
       "w"), where "(x1,y1)" is the current position of the cursor, and in any
       case move the virtual cursor to position "(x1+dx,y1+dy)".

       plotscale"(w,x1,x2,y1,y2)"

       scale the local coordinates of the rectwindow "w" so that "x" goes from
       "x1" to "x2" and "y" goes from "y1" to "y2" ("x2 < x1" and "y2 < y1"
       being allowed). Initially, after the initialization of the rectwindow
       "w" using the function "plotinit", the default scaling is the graphic
       pixel count, and in particular the "y" axis is oriented downwards since
       the origin is at the upper left. The function "plotscale" allows to
       change all these defaults and should be used whenever functions are
       graphed.

       plotstring"(w,x,{"flag" = 0})"

       draw on the rectwindow "w" the String "x" (see "Label se:strings"), at
       the current position of the cursor.

       flag is used for justification: bits 1 and 2 regulate horizontal align-
       ment: left if 0, right if 2, center if 1. Bits 4 and 8 regulate verti-
       cal alignment: bottom if 0, top if 8, v-center if 4. Can insert addi-
       tional small gap between point and string: horizontal if bit 16 is set,
       vertical if bit 32 is set (see the tutorial for an example).

       plotterm"("term")"

       sets terminal where high resolution plots go (this is currently only
       taken into account by the "gnuplot" graphical driver). Using the "gnu-
       plot" driver, possible terminals are the same as in gnuplot. If term is
       "?", lists possible values.

       Terminal options can be appended to the terminal name and space; termi-
       nal size can be put immediately after the name, as in "gif = 300,200".
       Positive return value means success.

       psdraw"("list")"

       same as "plotdraw", except that the output is a PostScript program
       appended to the "psfile".

       psploth"(X = a,b,"expr")"

       same as "ploth", except that the output is a PostScript program
       appended to the "psfile".

       psplothraw"("listx","listy")"

       same as "plothraw", except that the output is a PostScript program
       appended to the "psfile".

Programming under GP
       =head2 Control statements.

       A number of control statements are available under GP. They are simpler
       and have a syntax slightly different from their C counterparts, but are
       quite powerful enough to write any kind of program. Some of them are
       specific to GP, since they are made for number theorists. As usual, "X"
       will denote any simple variable name, and seq will always denote a
       sequence of expressions, including the empty sequence.

break"({n = 1})"
interrupts execution of current seq, and immediately exits from the "n" inner-
most enclosing loops, within the current function call (or the top level
loop). "n" must be bigger than 1.  If "n" is greater than the number of
enclosing loops, all enclosing loops are exited.

for"(X = a,b,"seq")"
the formal variable "X" going from "a" to "b", the seq is evaluated. Nothing
is done if "a > b".  "a" and "b" must be in R.

fordiv"(n,X,"seq")"
the formal variable "X" ranging through the positive divisors of "n", the
sequence seq is evaluated.  "n" must be of type integer.

forprime"(X = a,b,"seq")"
the formal variable "X" ranging over the prime numbers between "a" to "b"
(including "a" and "b" if they are prime), the seq is evaluated. More pre-
cisely, the value of "X" is incremented to the smallest prime strictly larger
than "X" at the end of each iteration. Nothing is done if "a > b". Note that
"a" and "b" must be in R.

  ? { forprime(p = 2, 12,
	print(p);
	if (p == 3, p = 6);
      )
    }
  2
  3
  7
  11

forstep"(X = a,b,s,"seq")"
the formal variable "X" going from "a" to "b", in increments of "s", the seq
is evaluated.  Nothing is done if "s > 0" and "a > b" or if "s < 0" and "a <
b". "s" must be in R"^*" or a vector of steps "[s_1,...,s_n]". In the latter
case, the successive steps are used in the order they appear in "s".

  ? forstep(x=5, 20, [2,4], print(x))
  5
  7
  11
  13
  17
  19

forsubgroup"(H = G,{B},"seq")"
executes seq for each subgroup "H" of the abelian group "G" (given in SNF form
or as a vector of elementary divisors), whose index is bounded by bound. The
subgroups are not ordered in any obvious way, unless "G" is a "p"-group in
which case Birkhoff's algorithm produces them by decreasing index. A subgroup
is given as a matrix whose columns give its generators on the implicit genera-
tors of "G". For example, the following prints all subgroups of index less
than 2 in "G = "Z"/2"Z" g_1  x "Z"/2"Z" g_2" :

  ? G = [2,2]; forsubgroup(H=G, 2, print(H))
  [1; 1]
  [1; 2]
  [2; 1]
  [1, 0; 1, 1]

The last one, for instance is generated by "(g_1, g_1 + g_2)". This routine is
intended to treat huge groups, when subgrouplist is not an option due to the
sheer size of the output.

For maximal speed the subgroups have been left as produced by the algorithm.
To print them in canonical form (as left divisors of "G" in HNF form), one can
for instance use

  ? G = matdiagonal([2,2]); forsubgroup(H=G, 2, print(mathnf(concat(G,H))))
  [2, 1; 0, 1]
  [1, 0; 0, 2]
  [2, 0; 0, 1]
  [1, 0; 0, 1]

Note that in this last representation, the index "[G:H]" is given by the
determinant.

forvec"(X = v,"seq",{"flag" = 0})"
"v" being an "n"-component vector (where "n" is arbitrary) of two-component
vectors "[a_i,b_i]" for "1 <= i <= n", the seq is evaluated with the formal
variable "X[1]" going from "a_1" to "b_1",...,"X[n]" going from "a_n" to
"b_n".	The formal variable with the highest index moves the fastest. If flag"
= 1", generate only nondecreasing vectors "X", and if flag" = 2", generate
only strictly increasing vectors "X".

if"(a,{"seq1"},{"seq2"})"
if "a" is non-zero, the expression sequence seq1 is evaluated, otherwise the
expression seq2 is evaluated. Of course, seq1 or seq2 may be empty, so "if
(a,"seq")" evaluates seq if "a" is not equal to zero (you don't have to write
the second comma), and does nothing otherwise, whereas "if (a,,"seq")" evalu-
ates seq if "a" is equal to zero, and does nothing otherwise. You could get
the same result using the "!" ("not") operator: "if (!a,"seq")".

Note that the boolean operators "&&" and "||" are evaluated according to oper-
ator precedence as explained in "Label se:operators", but that, contrary to
other operators, the evaluation of the arguments is stopped as soon as the
final truth value has been determined. For instance

  if (reallydoit && longcomplicatedfunction(), ...)%

is a perfectly safe statement.

Recall that functions such as "break" and "next" operate on loops (such as
"forxxx", "while", "until"). The "if" statement is not a loop (obviously!).

next"({n = 1})"
interrupts execution of current "seq", resume the next iteration of the inner-
most enclosing loop, within the current fonction call (or top level loop). If
"n" is specified, resume at the "n"-th enclosing loop. If "n" is bigger than
the number of enclosing loops, all enclosing loops are exited.

return"({x = 0})"
returns from current subroutine, with result "x".

until"(a,"seq")"
evaluates expression sequence seq until "a" is not equal to 0 (i.e. until "a"
is true). If "a" is initially not equal to 0, seq is evaluated once (more gen-
erally, the condition on "a" is tested after execution of the seq, not before
as in "while").

while"(a,"seq")"
while "a" is non-zero evaluate the expression sequence seq. The test is made
before evaluating the "seq", hence in particular if "a" is initially equal to
zero the seq will not be evaluated at all.

Specific functions used in GP programming

In addition to the general PARI functions, it is necessary to have some func-
tions which will be of use specifically for GP, though a few of these can be
accessed under library mode. Before we start describing these, we recall the
difference between strings and keywords (see "Label se:strings"): the latter
don't get expanded at all, and you can type them without any enclosing quotes.
The former are dynamic objects, where everything outside quotes gets immedi-
ately expanded.

We need an additional notation for this chapter. An argument between braces,
followed by a star, like "{"str"}*", means that any number of such arguments
(possibly none) can be given.

addhelp"(S,"str")"
 changes the help message for the symbol "S". The string str is expanded on
the spot and stored as the online help for "S". If "S" is a function you have
defined, its definition will still be printed before the message str.  It is
recommended that you document global variables and user functions in this way.
Of course GP won't protest if you don't do it.

There's nothing to prevent you from modifying the help of built-in PARI func-
tions (but if you do, we'd like to hear why you needed to do it!).

alias"("newkey","key")"
defines the keyword newkey as an alias for keyword key. key must correspond to
an existing function name. This is different from the general user macros in
that alias expansion takes place immediately upon execution, without having to
look up any function code, and is thus much faster. A sample alias file
"misc/gpalias" is provided with the standard distribution. Alias commands are
meant to be read upon startup from the ".gprc" file, to cope with function
names you are dissatisfied with, and should be useless in interactive usage.

allocatemem"({x = 0})"
this is a very special operation which allows the user to change the stack
size after initialization. "x" must be a non-negative integer. If "x! = 0", a
new stack of size "16*\lceil x/16\rceil" bytes will be allocated, all the PARI
data on the old stack will be moved to the new one, and the old stack will be
discarded. If "x = 0", the size of the new stack will be twice the size of the
old one.

Although it is a function, this must be the last instruction in any GP
sequence. The technical reason is that this routine usually moves the stack,
so objects from the current sequence might not be correct anymore. Hence, to
prevent such problems, this routine terminates by a "longjmp" (just as an
error would) and not by a return.

The library syntax is allocatemoremem"(x)", where "x" is an unsigned long, and
the return type is void. GP uses a variant which ends by a "longjmp".

default"({"key"},{"val"},{"flag"})"
sets the default corresponding to keyword key to value val. val is a string
(which of course accepts numeric arguments without adverse effects, due to the
expansion mechanism). See "Label se:defaults" for a list of available
defaults, and "Label se:meta" for some shortcut alternatives. Typing
"default()" (or "\d") yields the complete default list as well as their cur-
rent values.

If val is omitted, prints the current value of default key.  If flag is set,
returns the result instead of printing it.

error"({"str"}*)"
outputs its argument list (each of them interpreted as a string), then inter-
rupts the running GP program, returning to the input prompt.

Example: "error("n = ", n, " is not squarefree !")".

Note that, due to the automatic concatenation of strings, you could in fact
use only one argument, just by suppressing the commas.

extern"("str")"
the string str is the name of an external command (i.e. one you would type
from your UNIX shell prompt).  This command is immediately run and its input
fed into GP, just as if read from a file.

getheap"()"
returns a two-component row vector giving the number of objects on the heap
and the amount of memory they occupy in long words. Useful mainly for debug-
ging purposes.

The library syntax is getheap"()".

getrand"()"
returns the current value of the random number seed. Useful mainly for debug-
ging purposes.

The library syntax is getrand"()", returns a C long.

getstack"()"
returns the current value of "top-avma", i.e. the number of bytes used up to
now on the stack. Should be equal to 0 in between commands. Useful mainly for
debugging purposes.

The library syntax is getstack"()", returns a C long.

gettime"()"
returns the time (in milliseconds) elapsed since either the last call to "get-
time", or to the beginning of the containing GP instruction (if inside GP),
whichever came last.

The library syntax is gettime"()", returns a C long.

global"({"list of variables"})"

declares the corresponding variables to be global. From now on, you will be
forbidden to use them as formal parameters for function definitions or as loop
indexes. This is especially useful when patching together various scripts,
possibly written with different naming conventions. For instance the following
situation is dangerous:

  p = 3	  \\ fix characteristic
  ...
  forprime(p = 2, N, ...)
  f(p) = ...

since within the loop or within the function's body (even worse: in the sub-
routines called in that scope), the true global value of "p" will be hidden.
If the statement "global(p = 3)" appears at the beginning of the script, then
both expressions will trigger syntax errors.

Calling "global" without arguments prints the list of global variables in use.
In particular, "eval(global)" will output the values of all local variables.

input"()"
reads a string, interpreted as a GP expression, from the input file, usually
standard input (i.e. the keyboard). If a sequence of expressions is given, the
result is the result of the last expression of the sequence. When using this
instruction, it is useful to prompt for the string by using the "print1" func-
tion. Note that in the present version 2.19 of "pari.el", when using GP under
GNU Emacs (see "Label se:emacs") one must prompt for the string, with a string
which ends with the same prompt as any of the previous ones (a "? " will do
for instance).

install"("name","code",{"gpname"},{"lib"})"
loads from dynamic library lib the function name. Assigns to it the name
gpname in this GP session, with argument code code (see "Label se:gp.inter-
face" for an explanation of those). If lib is omitted, uses "libpari.so". If
gpname is omitted, uses name.

This function is useful for adding custom functions to the GP interpreter, or
picking useful functions from unrelated libraries. For instance, it makes the
function "system" obsolete:

  ? install(system, vs, sys, "libc.so")
  ? sys("ls gp*")
  gp.c		  gp.h		  gp_rl.c

But it also gives you access to all (non static) functions defined in the PARI
library. For instance, the function "GEN addii(GEN x, GEN y)" adds two PARI
integers, and is not directly accessible under GP (it's eventually called by
the "+" operator of course):

  ? install("addii", "GG")
  ? addii(1, 2)
  %1 = 3

Caution: This function may not work on all systems, especially when GP has
been compiled statically. In that case, the first use of an installed function
will provoke a Segmentation Fault, i.e. a major internal blunder (this should
never happen with a dynamically linked executable).  Hence, if you intend to
use this function, please check first on some harmless example such as the
ones above that it works properly on your machine.

kill"(s)"
 kills the present value of the variable, alias or user-defined function "s".
The corresponding identifier can now be used to name any GP object (variable
or function). This is the only way to replace a variable by a function having
the same name (or the other way round), as in the following example:

  ? f = 1
  %1 = 1
  ? f(x) = 0
    ***	  unused characters: f(x)=0
			      ^----
  ? kill(f)
  ? f(x) = 0
  ? f()
  %2 = 0

When you kill a variable, all objects that used it become invalid. You can
still display them, even though the killed variable will be printed in a funny
way (following the same convention as used by the library function
"fetch_var", see "Label se:vars"). For example:

  ? a^2 + 1
  %1 = a^2 + 1
  ? kill(a)
  ? %1
  %2 = #<1>^2 + 1

If you simply want to restore a variable to its ``undefined'' value (monomial
of degree one), use the quote operator: "a = 'a".  Predefined symbols ("x" and
GP function names) cannot be killed.

print"({"str"}*)"
outputs its (string) arguments in raw format, ending with a newline.

print1"({"str"}*)"
outputs its (string) arguments in raw format, without ending with a newline
(note that you can still embed newlines within your strings, using the "\n"
notation !).

printp"({"str"}*)"
outputs its (string) arguments in prettyprint (beautified) format, ending with
a newline.

printp1"({"str"}*)"
outputs its (string) arguments in prettyprint (beautified) format, without
ending with a newline.

printtex"({"str"}*)"
outputs its (string) arguments in TeX format. This output can then be used in
a TeX manuscript.  The printing is done on the standard output. If you want to
print it to a file you should use "writetex" (see there).

Another possibility is to enable the "log" default (see "Label se:defaults").
You could for instance do:

  default(logfile, "new.tex");
  default(log, 1);
  printtex(result);

(You can use the automatic string expansion/concatenation process to have
dynamic file names if you wish).

quit"()"
exits GP.

read"({"str"})"
reads in the file whose name results from the expansion of the string str. If
str is omitted, re-reads the last file that was fed into GP. The return value
is the result of the last expression evaluated.

reorder"({x = []})"
"x" must be a vector. If "x" is the empty vector, this gives the vector whose
components are the existing variables in increasing order (i.e. in decreasing
importance). Killed variables (see "kill") will be shown as 0. If "x" is
non-empty, it must be a permutation of variable names, and this permutation
gives a new order of importance of the variables, for output only. For exam-
ple, if the existing order is "[x,y,z]", then after "reorder([z,x])" the order
of importance of the variables, with respect to output, will be "[z,y,x]". The
internal representation is unaffected.

setrand"(n)"
reseeds the random number generator to the value "n". The initial seed is "n =
1".

The library syntax is setrand"(n)", where "n" is a "long". Returns "n".

system"("str")"
str is a string representing a system command. This command is executed, its
output written to the standard output (this won't get into your logfile), and
control returns to the PARI system. This simply calls the C "system" command.

trap"({e}, {"rec"}, {"seq"})"
tries to execute seq, trapping error "e", that is effectively preventing it
from aborting computations in the usual way; the recovery sequence rec is exe-
cuted if the error occurs and the evaluation of rec becomes the result of the
command. If "e" is omitted, all exceptions are trapped. Note in particular
that hitting "^C" (Control-C) raises an exception.

  ? \\ trap division by 0
  ? inv(x) = trap (gdiver2, INFINITY, 1/x)
  ? inv(2)
  %1 = 1/2
  ? inv(0)
  %2 = INFINITY

If seq is omitted, defines rec as a default action when encountering exception
"e". The error message is printed, as well as the result of the evaluation of
rec, and the control is given back to the GP prompt. In particular, current
computation is then lost.

The following error handler prints the list of all user variables, then stores
in a file their name and their values:

  ? { trap( ,
	print(reorder);
	write("crash", reorder);
	write("crash", eval(reorder))) }

If no recovery code is given (rec is omitted) a so-called break loop will be
started. During a break loop, all commands are read and evaluated as during
the main GP loop (except that no history of results is kept).

To get out of the break loop, you can use "next", "break" or "return"; reading
in a file by "\r" will also terminate the loop once the file has been read
("read" will remain in the break loop). If the error is not fatal ("^C" is the
only non-fatal error), "next" will continue the computation as if nothing had
happened (except of course, you may have changed GP state during the break
loop); otherwise control will come back to the GP prompt. After a user inter-
rupt ("^C"), entering an empty input line (i.e hitting the return key) has the
same effect as "next".

Break loops are useful as a debugging tool to inspect the values of GP vari-
ables to understand why a problem occurred, or to change GP behaviour
(increase debugging level, start storing results in a logfile, modify parame-
ters...) in the middle of a long computation (hit "^C", type in your modifica-
tions, then type "next").

If rec is the empty string "" the last default handler is popped out, and
replaced by the previous one for that error.

Note: The interface is currently not adequate for trapping individual excep-
tions. In the current version 2.2.0, the following keywords are recognized,
but the name list will be expanded and changed in the future (all library mode
errors can be trapped: it's a matter of defining the keywords to GP, and there
are currently far too many useless ones):

"accurer": accuracy problem

"gdiver2": division by 0

"archer": not available on this architecture or operating system

"typeer": wrong type

"errpile": the PARI stack overflows

type"(x,{t})"
this is useful only under GP. If "t" is not present, returns the internal type
number of the PARI object "x".	Otherwise, makes a copy of "x" and sets its
type equal to type "t", which can be either a number or, preferably since
internal codes may eventually change, a symbolic name such as "t_FRACN" (you
can skip the "t_" part here, so that "FRACN" by itself would also be all
right). Check out existing type names with the metacommand "\t".

GP won't let you create meaningless objects in this way where the internal
structure doesn't match the type. This function can be useful to create reduc-
ible rationals (type "t_FRACN") or rational functions (type "t_RFRACN"). In
fact it's the only way to do so in GP. In this case, the created object, as
well as the objects created from it, will not be reduced automatically, making
some operations a bit faster.

There is no equivalent library syntax, since the internal functions "typ" and
"settyp" are available. Note that "settyp" does not create a copy of "x", con-
trary to most PARI functions. It also doesn't check for consistency. "settyp"
just changes the type in place and returns nothing. "typ" returns a C long
integer. Note also the different spellings of the internal functions
("set")"typ" and of the GP function "type", which is due to the fact that
"type" is a reserved identifier for some C compilers.

whatnow"("key")"
if keyword key is the name of a function that was present in GP version
1.39.15 or lower, outputs the new function name and syntax, if it changed at
all (387 out of 560 did).

write"("filename",{"str"*})"
writes (appends) to filename the remaining arguments, and appends a newline
(same output as "print").

write1"("filename",{"str"*})"
writes (appends) to filename the remaining arguments without a trailing new-
line (same output as "print1").

writetex"("filename",{"str"*})"
as "write", in TeX format.

perl v5.8.8			  2007-10-29		       libPARI.dumb(3)
[top]
                             _         _         _ 
                            | |       | |       | |     
                            | |       | |       | |     
                         __ | | __ __ | | __ __ | | __  
                         \ \| |/ / \ \| |/ / \ \| |/ /  
                          \ \ / /   \ \ / /   \ \ / /   
                           \   /     \   /     \   /    
                            \_/       \_/       \_/ 
More information is available in HTML format for server OpenServer

List of man pages available for OpenServer

Copyright (c) for man pages and the logo by the respective OS vendor.

For those who want to learn more, the polarhome community provides shell access and support.

[legal] [privacy] [GNU] [policy] [cookies] [netiquette] [sponsors] [FAQ]
Tweet
Polarhome, production since 1999.
Member of Polarhome portal.
Based on Fawad Halim's script.
....................................................................
Vote for polarhome
Free Shell Accounts :: the biggest list on the net